087145-009-00 Scac Febr Door SHW

OBO-T-1464
Overseas Buildings Operations (OBO)

Kampala, Uganda
UNCLASSIFIED
OBO Comments to Submittal No. 087145-009-00
ProjNet Transmittal ID No. 087145-009-00
SCAC FEBR Door SHW

December 22, 2020
OBO has completed a review of the above referenced submittal in accordance with the contract
specifications, and finds this submittal ACCEPTED AS NOTED (AN)
General Notes:
1. This is a partial submission of elements specified under section 087145.
2. Failure of the USG to identify any deficiency does not relieve the contractor from fulfilling
its contractual obligations.
Review Notes:
1. Security Hardware for doors 5205/1, 5203, 5204, 5205, 5206, 5211 & 5212 have not been
included in this package. (AN)
2. Per CSI 087145/1.3/C provide Shop Drawings for power assisted operators -Indicate
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection. Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation
and safety devices. (RR)
3. Per CSI 087145/1.3/D Provide Hardware schedule that fulfills all the requirements of CSI
087145/1.3/D/1 – The submitted Hardware Schedule is incomplete. (AN)
4. Per CSI 087145/1.3/E include suppliers hardware set on the Hardware Schedule Index.
(AN)
5. Per CSI 087145/1.3/G “Submit with hardware Schedules complete wiring diagrams. This
has not been included in the submittal. (AN)
6. Operating Instructions have not been attached per Item #6 of Submittal Index. (AN)
7. Clarify Door Finish of D5210/5 – DIFC Door schedule indicates HC5. (AN/DOR)
8. (AN/DOR) comments require DOR review (IO)
OBO Kampala UNCLASSIFIED Page 1 of 1

UNCLASSIFIED
2. SUBMITTAL HISTORY AND COMMENTS
UNCLASSIFIED
Door SD submitted for approval via submittal
083185-014-00.
CUSH
The L series only has keypad on one side -

the EE Series has keypad both sides with a
knob, and is specified in the OBO Standard
set for SHW-12K. A lever handle is not
required because the door is not on an
accessible route.
Review with OBO.
Not sure the hardware can be configured
with LL1021 on each side as marked.
LL1021M LL1021M OBO TO REVIEW

COMMENT ABOVE
UNCLASSIFIED
3. SPECIFICATION SECTION
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
New Office Annex and New Support Annex Building SAQMMA-17-C-0319 March 1, 2019
Kampala, Uganda DESIGN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 087145 - SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections
1. Division 01 Section “Construction Submittals.”

2. Division 01 Section “Systems Manual and Operation and Maintenance Data.”
3. Division 08 Section for metal doors and frames.
4. Division 08 Section for wood doors.
5. Section 083185, “FE/BR Door Assemblies.”
6. Division 26 and 28 for electronic security and power for electrically operated hardware
devices.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Fabricate doors units with security hardware in accordance with all other requirements
in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
1. All submittals under this Section shall be submitted as PDF’s conforming to the Digital
Formatting requirements of Division 01 Section “Systems Manual and Operation and
Maintenance Data.” Refer to an “Adobe XI Pro Accessibility Guide” for implementation
guidance.
a. The Binder PDF shall be “Bookmarked” to identify each different “Submittal

Types” within the “Binder” PDF, and to identify sub-divisions within respective
Submittal Types
b. Appropriate “Shop Drawing (SDx)” submittals shall contain “Bookmarks” and
“Hyperlinks” that easily provide access to “Product Data (PDx)” and other
“Submittal Types,” within the “Binder” PDF.
c. Failure to provide a “Binder” PDF containing “Bookmarks” and “Hyperlinks” shall
be basis for rejecting submittals requiring concurrent submittal reviews.
d. Contractor shall also use “Reduced Size” saving process when finalizing the PDF
for submission. This has the following advantages:
e. Minimizes the ProjNet upload and download time
f. Maximizes navigation performance within the document.
g. Minimizes the document size for hard drive storage.
B. Product Data: Submittals (PDx format):
1. Manufacturer’s Catalog Data (PD1): This submittal shall be major part of a concurrent
review with Standard Color Charts (PD2), appropriate Shop Drawing (SDx) submittals
listed below.
SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 1

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2. Submit original PDF’s downloaded from the vendor websites (no scans), to include the
following: catalog cuts; brochures; construction and installation details; material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles; finishes; Submit copies of
catalog cuts of all items used in the supplier's schedule.
3. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: For power-assist operators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
2. Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices.
D. Hardware Schedules: Based on hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into groups or
sets showing complete designations of every item required for each door opening. Schedule shall
be vertical layout similar to the format used herein. Lines shall be double-spaced with pages
numbered and dated; Security Hardware Sets shall be listed as SHW-1, SHW-2, etc.
1. For doors of different sizes or where hinges, locks or closers are different, a separate
heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings.
Horizontal hardware schedules are not acceptable. Include the following:
a. Number, location, hand, fire rating, DOS Code, size and material of each door
opening (hands and swings to be determined in relation to key side of opening).
b. Type, style, function, size, finish and quantity of each hardware item.
c. Name and manufacturer of each item.
d. Fastening requirements.
e. Explanation of abbreviations used.
f. Keying information.
g. Wiring diagrams (after each corresponding hardware group).
E. Hardware Schedule Index: Furnish an index cross referencing Contract Document door number
and hardware group, and supplier's hardware set.
F. Keying Schedule: After the Hardware Schedule has been approved by the Government, submit
for Government review and approval a separate detailed schedule conforming to the
Government’s approved Master Key System. Prepare the Key Schedule using Microsoft Excel
and submit in electronic formats. Key Schedule shall include the following information:
1. Cover page entitled “Keying Schedule, Section 087145“ with the following information:
OBO Project Number (do not include city/country/location name); List of buildings
included in the schedule identified by building type (i.e. Utility Building, New Office
Building, etc.); General Contractor’s Name, address, and phone number; Supplier‘s name,
address and phone number; DS/FSE/TDB (DS Lock Support) complete address; Date of
issue; Revision Number; Name, email address, and phone number of the person who
drafted the schedule; Purchase Order (PO) or other Contract number.
2. Page two shall include General Information and the OBO Project Number as shown on the
Cover page. Each subsequent page shall also have the page number, number of total pages
and the OBO project number.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
3. Key Schedule spreadsheets shall include the OBO Project Number as shown on the Cover
page and shall be organized and subdivided by “Registry Group” type (e.g. Chancery RU-
1, Annex RU-2, Annex 32-01, Compound 32 series) and Building and NMK (KD &KA)
and SKD key sets as defined in section 2.11.A.1.j and k. Note: Actual Register number to
be generated by Medeco.
4. Spreadsheets shall be divided into Subsets by Category (e.g., FEBR, Telecom, CAA-Level
2, CAA-Level 3, SKD, Roof) and include the following information for each key:
REGISTRY GROUP
(e.g., Chancery RU, Annex RU, Annex 32, Compound 32):
Quantity
Door Room Key ID Change Control Master SHW

Number Description Number Cores Keys Keys Keys Set Notes
G. Wiring Diagrams (SD 7): Submit with hardware schedules complete wiring diagrams illustrating
point-to-point hook-up of all electrical hardware specified herein. Include fire alarm and/or access
control system interface where applicable. Diagrams shall be complete by opening and shall
indicate connections between all components affected. Manufacturers’ standard line diagrams are
not acceptable.
H. Samples: If requested by COR, submit one sample of each requested item tagged with full
description for coordination with the hardware schedule. These items will remain on file in the
COR's office until all other similar items have been installed in the project. At that time, items on
file will be released for installation in pre-determined Project locations.
I. Operating Instructions: Furnish the Government with one complete set of installation instructions,
including special adjusting tools and maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance
procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. One complete catalog
shall be furnished for each manufacturer listed in the approved hardware schedule.
J. Templates: Furnish templates and approved hardware schedule to door and frame fabricators.
Where fabricator cannot work to paper templates, ship templates and or physical hardware to
factories of respective manufacturers. Prepay cost for shipping and delivery.
K. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article.

2. Qualifications Data: Hardware Suppliers Qualification data.
L. Closeout Submittals: Submit specified warranty in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
M. Certification: After completion of hardware installation, submit written certification attesting that
hardware has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions and that
hardware has not been altered.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General Requirements: Hardware has been specified by manufacturer's name, brand and catalog
numbers for purpose of establishing basis for quality, design and operational function.
1. Provide designated product, or where more than one product or manufacturer is listed,
provide equivalent product of one of other listed manufacturers.
2. Obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturer.
3. Hardware Sets within this Section are not complete with respect to thickness of doors,
hand, backset, method of fastening, and other detail requirements.
4. Review Drawings and Door Schedules thoroughly and provide required hardware for all
openings, including openings that may have been inadvertently omitted from Door
Schedules.
5. Should opening be omitted or opening not indicated with hardware set, provide hardware
of same quality, design and function as specified for similar openings.
6. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation,
and interface with other building control systems indicated.
7. Furnish hardware complete with brackets, plates, fittings, fastenings and other accessories
required for installation.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with Architectural Barriers Act, in accordance with Chapter 11 of the OBO
Building Code, to accommodate barrier free design except where specifically indicated by
the Government.
2. Provide knurled tactile warning on door hardware to hazardous areas; abrasive coating not
acceptable.
3. Comply with NFPA 80 for hardware at fire-rated assemblies.
4. Provide hardware that has been tested and listed by UL or FM for fire-rated assemblies of
types that comply with requirements of door and frame labels.
5. Comply with National Electrical Code requirements for personnel doors to protect workers
in applicable electrical spaces.
6. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors (Except where Specifically Indicated
Otherwise): Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 67 N (15 lbf) to
release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for
operation.
7. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware for
a period of not less than two years, and who is, or who employs an Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) who will be available at reasonable times during the course of Work for
consultation about Project's hardware requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Division 01 requirements.
1. Pack each hardware item separately. Include manufacturer's printed installation

instructions, trim, fasteners accessories, and special tools necessary for installation.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2. Legibly mark and adequately label each package indicating opening for which intended.
Provide markings corresponding with approved Hardware Schedule.
3. Deliver permanent security cores and keys as indicated in Keying section, not less than 60
days prior to scheduled substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED PRODUCTS
A. See door hardware sets at end of this Section for approved products.
2.2 HINGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Brookfield Industries.
2. Maximum Security Products.
B. FE and FE/BR Hinges: For FE and FE/BR provide ANSI/BHMA compliant extra-heavy duty
needle bearing type hinges, minimum 910 kg (2000 pound) capacity per hinge, for door leafs
weighing 200 kg (450 pounds) or more and minimum 450 kg (1000 pound) capacity per hinge
for door leafs weighing 200 kg (450 pounds) or less. Polymer and Teflon bearing hinges are not
permitted. Provide cycle tested hinges per ANSI/BHMA 156.1-2013 on an actual door specimen
to a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles. Test shall be done using three hinges. Other minimum
requirements are as follows:
1. Cycle Testing: 1,000,000 (Exceeds ANSI requirements, DOS specific requirement).

2. Hinge Pin Rise: None Allowed.
3. Hinge Play: 0.38 mm (.015 inch).
4. Vertical Wear: 0.76 mm (.030 inch).
5. Lateral Wear: 1.60 mm (.062 inch).
C. For permanently adhered hinges provide ANSI/BHMA compliant extra-heavy duty needle
bearing type hinges, minimum 910 kg (2000 pound) capacity per hinge, for double weight doors.
Polymer and Teflon bearing hinges are not permitted. Provide cycle tested hinges per
ANSI/BHMA 156.1-2013 on an actual door specimen to a minimum of 1,500,000 cycles. Other
minimum requirements are as follows:
1. Cycle Testing: 1,500,000.

2. Hinge Pin Rise: None Allowed.
3. Hinge Play: 0.38 mm (.015 inch).
4. Vertical Wear: 0.76 mm (.030 inch).
5. Lateral Wear: 1.60 mm (.062 inch).
D. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:
1. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous
through hinge knuckle.
2. Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
3. Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and
continuous through hinge knuckle, and with concealed electrical monitoring switch.
2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors,
and as follows:
1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 19 mm (3/4-inch) latchbolt throw.

2. Deadbolts: Minimum 25-mm (1-inch) bolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 70 mm (2-3/4 inches), unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated by manufacturer's design designation in Part 3.

2. Levers: Cast.
3. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought or Solid Stainless Steel.
4. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
5. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to
protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum
framing.
F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational and Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel
or brass parts; Series 1000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; ASSA ABLOY, - Manufacturer named in

Door Hardware Schedule below.
b. Schlage; Allegion.
2.4 CYLINDERS, CORES AND KEYS
A. Provide cylinders, cores and keys for locks, and other control and locking devices indicated in the
Hardware Sets.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
B. Security Doors:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Medeco Security Locks, Inc. an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. No substitutions.
2. Description:
a. Original high security cylinder with interchangeable core. Provide Medeco six-pin
high security cylinder with interchangeable core.
b. All cylinders shall be equipped with temporary construction core for use during
construction. The contractor is responsible for the purchase of the final cores and
coordination of their secure shipment to the project site through DS.
3. Cylinders, Cores, & Keys:
a. Provide mortise/rim cylinder shells with tailpieces/cams and interchangeable cores

for locks and other access control locking devices indicated in the SHW Hardware
Sets.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Medeco Security Locks, Inc.,

P.O. Box 3075
Salem, VA 24153
4. Lock Types:
a. Description:
1) Type 1: Mechanical.
a) Six-Pin Large Format Interchangeable Core (LFIC); Medeco Original

product (32-) with commercial keyway (00).

2) Type 2: Mechanical.
a) Six-Pin LFIC; Medeco M3 Original product (32F) with DS reserved

keyway (RU).
C. The contractor is responsible for supplying temporary construction cores in the Medeco original
product (32-) with Commercial (00) Keyway for all cylinders during construction.
1. Upon installation of final cores, construction cores are to be returned to the construction
contractor. All attempts will be made to use returned construction cores from previous jobs
versus purchasing them as new. Cost for shipping re-used construction cores to and from
the jobsite is the responsibility of OBO.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2.5 KEY CONTROL ACCESSORIES
A. Stand-Alone Key Cabinets: At Post 1, ESP includes Diebold KC-1612 wall mounted key cabinet
with dual control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking clips, receipt forms,
three-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and metal cabinet. Equip
the cabinet with pin tumbler locking mechanism. Provide unit capable of storing a minimum of
200 keys.
1. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection. Indicate weight capacity of drawer and show/indicate
organization method of keys.
2. Shop drawings to be submitted to OBO for approval.
2.6 POWER-ASSIST OPERATORS
1. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2. No Substitutions.
B. Standard: BHMA A156.19.
C. Description: Units shall be pneumatically powered; surface mounted to frame head, and shall
operate as manual door closers unless power-assist is activated and when power is lost.
1. Activation of power-assist shall open doors to 90-degrees.

2. Furnish actuators with satin stainless steel dress plates embossed with the universal
handicap symbol. Refer to Chapter 11 of the OBO Building Code for the power assist
operators requirements.
3. Opening Force:
a. If Power Fails: Not more than 67 N (15 lbf) required to release a latch if provided,
not more than 133 N (30 lbf) required to manually set door in motion, and not more
than 67 N (15 lbf) required to fully open door.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 22 N (5 lbf) to fully open door.
4. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 67 N (15 lbf) required to prevent stopped door from
closing or opening.
D. Required Features: Manufacturer's standard cast iron construction.
1. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic.

2. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves.
3. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50 percent in field to suit individual
door conditions.
4. Adjustable hydraulic backcheck.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2.7 AUXILIARY HARDWARE
1. Hager Companies.
2. Ives Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Inc.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc. (“Trimco” – see www.trimcobbw.com)
B. Manual Flush Bolts: Top manual flush bolt shall not exceed 1880 mm (74-inches) from floor to
centerline.
C. Door Stops: Furnish wall stops equal to Ives 407CVX or Rockwood 400 wherever trim strikes
wall. Where wall stops are not suitable, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn-
Johnson 450 Series. Where door closers are specified in the Hardware Sets and wall stops are not
suitable, provide closer arms with built-in stops (LCN No.3077-CNS).
D. Silencers: Furnish rubber silencers equal to Ives SR64 or Rockwood 608 for hollow metal frames;
three per single door and four per pair. Silencers are not required at doors specified to receive
continuous weather-stripping or seals.
2.8 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
1. Architectural Builders Hardware.

2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
3. Rixson, an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
B. Where wall stops are not suitable, furnish surface overhead stops equal to Glynn-Johnson 450
Series. In Hardware Sets where door closers are specified, provide closer arms with built-in stops
(LCN No.3077-CNS). Floor stops are not allowed without written authorization of OBO.
2.9 THRESHOLDS, WEATHER-STRIPPING AND SEALS
1. Hager Companies.
2. National Guard Products.
3. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
5. Zero International, Inc.
B. Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for grade and style. Where required, field modify
thresholds to accept strikes for flush bolts and exit device rods.
C. Smoke Seals: Where required by applicable code, at doors located in Smoke Barrier Partitions,
provide smoke seals equal to Pemko S88 at the head and jambs; and at pairs of doors, one Pemko
375CR or two Pemko 303AS astragal seals as appropriate; coordinate with Drawings and
schedules.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
D. Astragals: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide overlapping astragals equal to Pemko
357SP. Astragals shall be full height, installed on the "threat" side of the opening.
2.10 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
A. Provide full door gasketing/acoustical seals with flat threshold installed to maintain STC rating
of surrounding walls.
B. Certification: Provide certification that the door construction utilized has been tested at an
independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90-90, and that the STC determined in
accordance with ASTM E413-87 is not less than that specified. The laboratory referenced in the
certification must be qualified under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NAVLAP) of the U.S. Bureau of Standards. Certification must reference laboratory name, test
report number, and date of test; substitution of test data not in accordance with ASTM E90-04
and E413-87 will not be acceptable.
C. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency,
for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
D. Secondary Requirements: If fire resistance is required, certify that assemblies have been tested in
accordance with UL 10B for labeled fire doors and frames and meets the requirements of NFPA
80. If seismic stability is required, submit calculations showing ability of door systems to
withstand pertinent seismic forces.
2.11 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
3. Rixson, an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
B. Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for size and style. Install wall holders with shims as
required for a complete installation; coordinate with Drawings and details.
1. Wall Actuators: LCN, an Allegion company.

2. Post Actuators: MS Sedco.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2.12 KEYING
A. The following is the DOS required keying plan for SECURITY DOOR OPENINGS:
1. All keying systems must be factory generated and recorded.
a. All key operated locks on individual doors and multiple doors into the same space
shall be keyed alike, unless noted otherwise.
b. Grand Master and Great Grand Master systems and engineering keys are not
permitted.
c. Acquisition Control Facilities (ACF)
1) If FE or FE/BR doors included, the CAC keying requirements shall be

followed, to include shipping and installation requirements.
a) If ACF includes any CAA or LAA doors: All CAA and LAA doors shall
be SKD.
2) If no FE or FE/BR rated doors included, no additional requirements (contractor

shall design/furnished/ and installed keying).
d. Office Buildings (i.e., New office annexes (NOX), Existing Office Buildings (EOB))
shall use the Medeco M3 original product (32F) with reserved RU Keyway. Each
office building shall have a unique factory generated registry number and not extend
to another building. Exceptions for Medeco M3 use in office buildings are
specifically listed in the subparagraphs on Office Building and on Other Building
Types.
1) New doors in existing office buildings shall follow the existing keying scheme,
unless the work is a major building rehabilitation or otherwise directed by the
OBO.
e. Other Building Types: Residential buildings, Marine Security Guard Residences

(MSGR), warehouse (WHE), compound emergency shelter, recreational building
(REC), USAID, mechanical/engineering/plumbing (MEP) buildings, compound
access control (CAC) shall use the Medeco original product (32-) with commercial
(00) Keyway and shall use one registry number for all the originally product.
f. All exterior forced entry (FE) and forced-entry/ballistic-resistant (FE/BR) doors
shall have an interior cylinder with a non-removable thumb turn on the Force Entry
Locks (FELs).
g. The keying schedule shall use the following definitions and nomenclature when
describing the key requirements:
1) Keyed Alike (KA) – Cylinder/core pinning which results in the same change
key working two or more locks.
2) Keyed Different (KD) – Cylinder/core pinning which results in a different
change key being required for each of two or more locks.
3) Single Keyed Different (SKD) – a single core with unique pinning, change,
and control keys; not associated with any cores in any other Master Keyed
System used at post.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4) Master Keyed (MK) – Cylinder/core pinning which results in operation by

both a change key and at least one master key.
5) Non-Master Keyed (NMK) - Core pinning which results in operation by
change key only; built from the same Top Level Master Key but not pinned to
operate by it.
6) Change key - operates lock/s.
7) Control key - install/remove interchangeable core/s.
h. Security doors shall be KD and MK within the following categories [exception:

CACs see below subparagraph i:
1) MK1 – Exterior building perimeter FE and FE/BR doors;

2) MK2 - Interior FE and FE/BR doors;
3) MK3 – Electrical/wire closets;
4) MK4 – Telephone wire closets;
5) MK5 – Technical security systems (TSS) EC Room doors (when multiple EC
rooms or sub EC room exists; otherwise EC room is SKD).
6) Master Key 6, 7 and beyond - MK by CAA floor (number of master keys in
CAA depend on number of floors in the building), except for the PCC and
secure conference rooms;
7) Master Key 8 – All other security doors in the building with the exception as
noted below.
i. The following Security doors shall be KA and NMK within their own numbered
categories. Each numbered category shall be KD from all others:
1) Roof access doors;

2) Safe Haven Compound Emergency Sanctuary or Safe Area;
3) Limited access area (LAA) Lock and Leave doors.
j. The security doors shall be NMK and 1) KD for a single lock on a single door or 2)
KA for multiple doors/locks into the same area. No two areas are to be KA:
1) Telephone Equipment Rooms ( PBX, TSEF, MTS);

2) PCC Generator Room;
3) React Room or MSG Suite;
4) Doors within the PCC;
5) Secure Conference rooms;
6) Primary Lock and Leave doors;
7) EC Room – if only one;
8) PCC Switchgear;
9) Secure Command Center (SCC);
10) Tactical Operation Commands (TOC);
11) Post 1;
12) Guard Booths;
13) Pharmacy;
14) Roof Maintenance Sheds (RMS).

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
k. The following doors shall be SKD:
1) PCC.
l. All CAC’s on a compound shall be keyed as follows:
1) Street side exterior doors – KA;

2) Compound Side exterior doors, to include sally port – KA (KD from the street
side doors);
3) CAC guard booth – SKD;
4) CAC utility demarcation rooms – SKD;
5) Interior/compound/sally port non-forced entry control doors (EC room, pump
room, telephone and/or electrical rooms) shall be SKD.
m. Chief of Mission Residence (CMR) and Residences with FE or FE/BR doors – KA

all exterior doors (per individual building or individual dwelling unit).
1) Safe areas in stand-alone residences shall be SKD;

2) Safe areas in multiple unit buildings (apartments or townhouses) shall be KD
and MK by building.
B. The Project Director, the General Contractor's representative, and either the RSO or the PSO shall
meet to determine if there are any special keying conditions required so they may be incorporated
into the keying schedule and provide recommendations for any deviation from the above
specification to OBO/CFSM/SM/SCD/SEB for review and approval before the keying
plan/schedule is submitted.
1. The General Contractor shall submit a keying plan/schedule no later than 10 working days
after the approval of the FE, FE/BR and secure door shop drawings.
C. Key Quantities: Furnish plain bow keys of nickel silver material in the following quantities:
1. For each master key system, provide:
a. Two master keys;

b. One control key;
c. Two change keys per keyed different core.
2. For each individually KD or SKD core, provide:
a. One control key;

b. Two change keys.
3. For each individually keyed alike (KA) core, provide:
a. One control key;

b. Two change keys per door.
4. For each construction key system, provide:
a. All construction cores shall be colored different than final cores.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
b. Construction cores and keys shall be turned over to the USG Project Director or
Diplomatic Security.
c. Two control keys.
d. Operating change keys per quantity of construction cores as follows:
1) One to 10 doors: four key;

2) 10 or more doors: 20 or as directed by the USG.
D. Identification and Control:
1. Identify master keys (MK) with registry number; do not stamp with master key, letter M,
or similar identification; manufacturer's trademark or identification not allowed.
2. Stamp master keys with DO NOT DUPLICATE.
E. Delivery
1. Deliver construction cores, construction control keys, and construction keys to the Project
Site.
2. Permanent cores, change keys and permanent control keys shall be individually packaged
by the door, identified by door and lock. Shipment shall be by supplier via prepaid freight
to:
DS Lock Support
5800 Barclay Drive, Suite 3
Alexandria, Virginia 22315-5700
3. Clearly mark shipping boxes; indicate OBO PROJECT AND/OR PURCHASE ORDER
NUMBERS ONLY. A pinning schedule is required for all prepared systems.
4. After removal of temporary construction cores, ship construction cores, construction keys,
and construction control keys to the above-mentioned address.
2.13 FINISHES
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using
manufacturers' standard metal alloy of composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser
quality than specified or inferred by use of a particular manufacturer's number, style or grade or
as established by appropriate referenced specification listed herein.
B. Finishes: Finishes shall conform to the quality of finish including thickness of plating or coating
(if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturers' standards, but
in no case less than the standards established by ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
1. All exposed hardware except door closers shall be satin stainless steel, ANSI/BHMA
630/US32D. Closers shall be painted to match satin stainless steel. Hinges shall be satin
stainless steel. Items not available in stainless steel shall be furnished with satin chrome
finish, ANSI/BHMA 626/US26D.
2. Security hardware finish shall match finish of non-security hardware to the maximum
extent possible.
C. Prime Coated Items: Field painted under Division 09 painting section.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2.14 FASTENERS
A. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepare for machine screw
installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping or sheet metal screws
except as specifically indicated.
1. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat head or oval
head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)
screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the
finish of such work as closely as possible, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when the door is closed,
except to the extent no standard manufactured units of the type specified are available with
concealed fasteners.
3. Do not use through bolts for installation except where it is not possible to adequately
reinforce the work, to accept machine screws or concealed fasteners or other standard type,
to satisfactory avoid the use of through bolts. Grommet nuts and cealnuts are not
acceptable.
B. Furnish fasteners that are compatible with both the units fastened and the substrates, and which
will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material reinforcement, or fastener.
Furnish wall stops with expansion anchors and machine screws. Furnish thresholds with lead
anchors and 1/4-20 stainless steel machine screws.
2.15 ACCESSORIES
A. Door Coat and Hat Hook: Provide cast aluminum, double prong hooks on inside face of all private
office doors and toilet rooms; Ives Model No. 405 wide body design (ANSI/BHMA A156.16,
L33113).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware plumb, level, and true to line in accordance with manufacturer's templates and
Project conditions.
1. Install fire rated hardware in accordance with NFPA 80.

2. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be field painted or similarly finished,
install, fit, remove and store hardware prior to finishing. Reinstall hardware after finishing
operations are completed.
3. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
4. Reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for installation and operation.
5. Mortise work to correct size and location without gouging, splintering or causing
irregularities in exposed finish work.
6. Fit faces of mortised components snug and flush without excessive clearance.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
7. Set thresholds at exterior doors in bed of sealant. Remove excess sealant.
B. Hardware Mounting Heights: Mount hardware units at heights recommended by DHI (see
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware") on custom doors except as otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise
indicated.
C. Cylinder Cores: When instructed, Contractor shall remove temporary construction cores.
Permanent cores will be installed by the Government. After installation of the permanent cores,
ship construction cores, operating keys, and control keys via pre-paid freight to the DS/PEL/SEM
address noted in Paragraph on "Keying."
D. Power-Assist Operators: Where post mounted actuator buttons are indicated, run signal wire
below grade in conduit complying with Division 26. Elsewhere, run signal wire concealed in
Technical Security System conduit. Run pneumatic lines between pumps and door operators
concealed. At curtain walls, run pneumatic lines concealed in metal trays finished to match curtain
wall.
E. Key Management System: Install primary and secondary cabinet immediately adjacent to each
other. Place cabinet with keypad and control console as the right of the two cabinets (as viewed
facing the cabinets). Provide power and data outlets at keypad and control console. Place system
in conformance to accessibility requirements of the OBO Building Code.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure correct operation and function.
1. Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least
3 seconds to move to a point 75 mm (3 inches) from the latch, measured to the leading edge
of the door.
2. Ensure weather-stripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door.
3. Lubricate moving or operating components as recommended by hardware manufacturer.
Use graphite type lubrication if none other is recommended.
4. Replace defective materials or units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Reinstall items found improperly installed.
5. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and reapply lubricant to hardware items
as necessary.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Government's designated personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware

at time of Substantial Completion.
1. In the presence of the Government's representative, demonstrate that the keys operate freely
in designated unit.
2. Hardware Supplier: Completely set-up key control system with keys tagged and placed in
cabinet. Cross index system executed with appropriate information typed in on index cards
and instruct Government's designated personnel in the proper use of the system.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
3.5 HARDWARE SETS – SECURE DOORS
SHW-1B
QUAN. ITEM MODEL & NOTES MFR.

Certified Forced Entry Hinge Model and quantity to match
certified/rated door.
1 Panic Exit Device EL98NL x 990NL-R x 299 strike- Von Duprin
32D
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim Cylinder 32-0400V-15 x CT-Y32 with Medeco
cylinder spacer ring
Certified Forced Entry Lock Model and quantity to match
1 Electromagnetic Locking Device Vista VM1290DB Securitron
1 Electric Power Transfer EPT-10 x SP28 Von Duprin
1 Pneumatic Auto-Equalizer 4840 LCN
1 Cover 4840-72MC LCN
1 Stop 4840-3077CNS Cush-n-Stop LCN
1 Pneumatic Transfer Hinge 4840-460 LCN
Pneumatic Tubing 7910-925 LCN
1 Door Control Package 7981 or 7982 (for two doors) LCN
1 Door Control Relay Interface 941-R AES
1 Door Control Module 941-M AES
2 Wall Mounted Switches 625-BL-H-DP-626 Schlage
1 Magnetic Switch MSS-312C Magnasphere
1 Set Weather Stripping 332CR Pemko
1 Sill Sweep 315CN Pemko
*Hardware does not include the step down transformer required for operation of the AES 941. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary transformers.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-1C

1 Panic Exit Device RXEL98NL-F x 990NL-R x Von Duprin
299F strike-32D (Allegion)
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim 32-0400V-32D x CT-Y32 with Medeco
Cylinder cylinder spacer ring
1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 390+ DSM/MBS Locknetics
(Schlage)
1 Card Reader Various
Manuf.
(Allegion)
(Electric Power Transfer) (CDL-AL-FX) (Command
Access
Technologies)
Contractor shall provide all necessary transformers

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-2A

32D
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim Cylinder 32-0400V-15 x CT-Y32 with Medeco
cylinder spacer ring
1 Digi*Trac Scramble Pad Controller M2N or M2N 230 (for 230 VAC) Hirsch
1 Scramble Pad DS47L or DS47L-HI (for exterior Hirsch
applications)
1 Mounting Box MB-8 Hirsch
Certified Forced Entry Lock Exterior Medeco
Keyed Cylinders
1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 2268-10 x DYNST x 24V Dynalock
1 Closer 4040XP x Cush-n-Stop – AL LCN
3 Silencers SR 64 Ives
For Doors that are identified as
Exterior, include the following within
the SHW set in lieu of silencers:

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-2C

1 Mechanical Push Button L(hand)1021M-26D – 41 Kaba Ilco
Combination Lock
1 Interchangeable Core 32-0201-26-00S Medeco
Certified Forced Entry Lock Medeco
Exterior Keyed Cylinders
1 Electromagnetic Locking 2268-10 x DYN x 24V Dynalock
Device
Exterior, include the following
within the SHW set in lieu of
silencers:

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-2D

1 Panic Exit Device EL98NL x 990NL-R x 299 Von Duprin
strike-32D
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim 32-0400V-15 x CT-Y32 with Medeco
1 Digi*Trac Scramble Pad Controller M2N or M2N 230 (for 230 VAC) Hirsch
1 Scramble Pad DS47L or DS47L-HI (for exterior Hirsch
applications)
1 Mounting Box MB-8 Hirsch
silencers:

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-2F

1 Panic Exit Device RXEL98NL-F x 990NL-R x Von Duprin
299F strike – 32D (Allegion)
1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 390+ DSM/MBS Locknetics
(Schlage)
1 Card Reader Various Manufactures
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-3
1 Lockset ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Corbin Russwin
Scalp Plate 402F30
1 Interchangeable Core & Mortise 32-0200-26D x CT-Z00 Medeco
Cylinder

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-3B
1 Lockset ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Corbin Russwin
Scalp Plate 402F30
Cylinder
SHW-3B MOD1 – MOD replaces lockset with exit device

1 Panic Exit Device 98L x 996L-R x 299 strike – Von Duprin
32D (Allegion)
Cylinder

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-4

1 Lockset ML2067 X NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
Cylinder
1 Door Viewer (peep)
1 Wall Stop WS407CVX {630} Ives
SHW-4A

1 Lockset ML2067 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
Cylinder
1 Electromagnetic Door Release 999 Rixson
2 Wall Stops WS407CVX {630} Ives

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-4A MOD1 - MOD is for a pair of doors with passage set


Certified Head and Foot Bolts Model and quantity to match
1 Passage set ML2010 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
2 Closer 4040XP x Cush-n-Stop – AL, LCN
template to meet magnetic
release
1 Door Coordinator Model required for
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 999 Rixson
1 Door Viewer (peep) Model required for
2 Silencers S64

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-4A MOD2 – MOD replaces wall magnetic holder with floor mounted magnetic holder

1 Lockset ML2067 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
Cylinder
1 Electromagnetic Door Release 980 – floor mounted Rixson

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-5A

1 Panic Exit Device EL98TP x 990TP-R x 299 strike – Von Duprin
32D (Allegion)
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-5B

1 Panic Exit Device EL98EO x 299 strike-32D Von Duprin
(Allegion)

1 Pneumatic Tubing 7910-925 LCN
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-5E

1 Panic Exit Device RXEL98TP x 990TP-R x 299 Von Duprin
strike – 32D (Allegion)
*1 Door Control Relay Interface 941-R AES
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
For 180-degree Door #2205

include the following within the
SHW set:
1 Magnetic Holder SEM 7820-AL {689} LCN

(Allegion)
Floor Mounted
SHW-6A

32D (Allegion)
1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 2268-10 x DYN x 24V Dynalock
2 Closer 4414ME x 24VDC - AL LCN
1 Door Coordinator Model and quantity to match
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)
1 Set Stile Gaskets 375CR Pemko

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-6B

1 Panic Exit Device RXEL98NL x 990NL-R x 299 Von Duprin
strike-32D (Allegion)
2 Closer 4414ME x 24VDC - AL LCN
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-7
3* Hinge-NRP (non-removable pin) BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4- Hager

1/2"
1 Lock set ML20906-XSEC x NSM x Corbin Russwin
32D
Cylinder
1 Cypher Lock / Keypad CC-8521B Moniteq
2 Rechargeable Batteries 7AH CC-BATT x 12VDC x 7AH Moniteq
(Allegion)
(Electric Power Transfer) (CDL-AL-FX) (Command Acces
Technologies)
(*) For doors taller than 2286 mm provide 4 hinges.
SHW-7C

1/2"
1 Mechanical Push Button Simplex L(hand)1021M-26D – Kaba Ilco
Combination Lock 41
1 Interchange Core 32-0201-26-00S Medeco

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-8

1 Panic Exit Device RX98EO-F x 299F strike – Von Duprin
32D (Allegion)
1 Fire Door Magnetic Lock with CC-8946 Moniteq
Display Panel
(Allegion)
Technologies)
1 Fire Door Control Module AES-945 AES

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-8 MOD1 – MOD is for a pair of doors


1 Panic Exit Device RX98EO-F x 299F strike – Von Duprin
32D (Allegion)
Display Panel
(Allegion)
Technologies)
SHW-8A
Certified Forced Entry Hinge Model and quantity to

match certified/rated door.
Certified Forced Entry Lock Model and quantity to
match certified/rated door.
Interior Keyed Cylinders
2 Door Pull 98DT-26D Von Duprin
(Allegion)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-8B

1 Panic Exit Device RX98NL-F x 990NL-R x 299F Von Duprin
strike – 32D (Allegion)
Display Panel
(Allegion)
Access
Technologies)
1 Recessed Mount Key Control 4440-GCI Knox or DS
Lockbox with Combination Lock approved equal
1 Toggle Switch DPST

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-11
3* Hinge-NRP (non-removable BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" Hager

pin)
1 Mechanical Push Button Simplex L(hand)1021M-26D – 41 Kaba Ilco
Combination Lock
1 Electromechanical Combination CDX-10 (GSA Specification FF-L- Kaba Mas
Lock 2890)
1 Closer 4040XP x regular arm – AL LCN
SHW-11A

1/2"
Combination Lock 41
1 Combination Lock with Extension 8555 x 101 Sargent &
Greenleaf
1 Closer 4040XP x regular arm – AL LCN

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-12A

3** Hinge-NRP (non-removable pin) BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" Hager
1 Lock set ML2057 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
1 Interchangeable Core & Mortise 32-0200-15 x CT-Z00 Medeco
Cylinder
1 Maxum Deadbolt 11-C422 – 26D Medeco
2 Interchangeable Core 32-0201 – 26D Medeco
1 Electric Strike 310-2 3/4 x 24 DC (fail secure) Folger Adam
silencers:
*Hardware does not include the step-down transformer required for operation of the AES 941 and
7981. The Contractor shall provide all necessary transformers.
** For doors taller than 2286 mm provide 4 hinges.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-12B
1/2"
Combination Lock 41
1 Maxum Deadbolt 11-C402 – 26D Medeco
1 Interchangeable Core 32-0201 – 26D Medeco
1 Electric Strike 310-2 3/4 x 24 DC (fail secure) Folger Adam

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-12I
1 Lock set ML2057 x NSM x 32D** Corbin Russwin
1 Interchangeable Core & 32-0200-26D x CT-Z00 Medeco
Mortise Cylinder
2 Certified Forced Entry Lock Medeco
1 Maxum Deadbolt 11-C422-26D Medeco
1 Electromagnetic Locking 2268-10 x DYN x 24V Dynalock
Device
1 Electric Strike 310-2 3/4 x 24 DC (fail Folger Adam
secure)
silencers:
**Rigid handle will be to the inside of the door

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-12J
1 Lock set ML2057 x NSM x 32D** Corbin
Russwin
Mortise Cylinder
2 Certified Forced Entry Lock Medeco
1 Electromagnetic Locking Vista VM1290DB Securitron
Device
1 Electric Strike 310-2 3/4 x 24 DC Folger Adam
1 Door Control Module 941-M AES ***
2 Wall Mounted Switches 625-BL-H-DP-626 Schlage ***
silencers:
**Rigid handle will be to the inside of the door
*** Wall switch wired to operate only after access is granted by the guard.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-12K
1 Mechanical Push Button Simplex EE1021M / EE1021M- Kaba Ilco
Combination Lock 26D – 41
2 Interchangeable Core 32-0201-26D Medeco
1 Closer 4040XP-SRI x Cush-n-Stop – LCN
AL

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-13

1/2"
1 Lock set ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Scalp Corbin
Plate 402F30 Russwin
Cylinder
1 Closer 4040XP-SRI x Regular Arm-AL LCN

SHW-13 – MOD1 - MOD replaces lockset with exit device

pin)
1 Panic Exit Device 98L-NL x 06 x 299 F Strike-32D Von Duprin
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim 32-0400V -19 x CT-Z00 Medeco
Cylinder
1 Closer 4040XP-SRI x CUSH– AL LCN

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-13 – MOD2 – MOD replaces lockset with exit device and add exterior door seals

pin)
1 Panic Exit Device 98L-NL x 06 x 299 F Strike-32D Von Duprin
1 Interchangeable Core & Rim 32-0400V -19 x CT-Z00 Medeco
Cylinder
1 Closer 4040XP x CUSH– AL LCN
SHW-13-MOD3 – MOD for Sound door, indicates sound seals by door manufacturer

pin)
1 Lock set ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Scalp Corbin
Plate 402F30 Russwin
Mortise Cylinder
1 Closer 4040XP-SRI x Regular Arm-AL LCN
1 Perimeter Seal System By sound door manufacturer
1 Door Bottom Seal System By sound door manufacturer
1 Threshold By sound door manufacturer

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-13A
3* Hinge-NRP (non-removable BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4- Hager

pin) 1/2"
1 Lock set ML2022 x NSM – 32D Corbin Russwin
Mortise Cylinder
(*) For doors taller than 2286 mm provide 4 hinges
SHW-15A

pin)
Combination Lock
1 Wall Stop 407CVX Ives

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-15D

1/2"
Combination Lock 41
SHW-16A

6* Hinge-NRP (non-removable pin) BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" Hager
2 Head and Foot Flush Bolts 555 Rockwood
1 Mechanical Push Button L(hand)1021M-26D – 41 Simplex
Combination Lock
1 Interchangeable Core 32-0201-26D Medeco

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-16B

pin) 1/2"
1 Lock set ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Scalp Corbin Russwin
Plate 402F30
Cylinder
2 Closer 4040XP x Cush-n-Stop - AL LCN
certified / rated door

within the SHW set:
1 set Weather Gasketing (in lieu of 332CR Pemko
the Silencers)

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-16B - MOD1 – MOD for sound door add seals and threshold

pin) 1/2"
1 Lock set ML2067 x NSM x 32D w/ Scalp Corbin Russwin
Plate 402F30
Cylinder
2 Closer 4040XP x Cush-n-Stop - AL LCN
certified / rated door
1 Perimeter Seals System By sound door manufacturer
1 Astragal Seals System By sound door manufacturer
1 Door Bottom Seal By sound door manufacturer
1 Threshold By sound door manufacturer

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-19

certified / rated door.
1 Passage Set ML2010 x NSM – 32D Corbin Russwin
1 Combination Lock with Deadbolt 8555-102 Sargent &
Extension Greenleaf
1 Spin Dial Cover WPC1020D Lockmasters
SHW-19A

1 Passage Set ML2010 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
2 Sill Sweeps 315CN Pemko

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-19B

1 Passage Set ML2010 x NSM x 32D Corbin Russwin
1 Combination Lock with Deadbolt 8555 x 102 Sargent &
Extension Greenleaf
1 Closer 4040XP x S-H-CNS – AL LCN

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-19B MOD1, MOD provides exit device in lieu of passage set


1 Panic Exit Device 98L- BE x 06 x 299 F Von Duprin
Strike-32D
Extension Greenleaf

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-19C

1 Panic Exit Device 98TP x 299F strike -32D Von Duprin
(Allegion)
Extension Greenleaf

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-19D

1 Panic Exit Device 98TP x 299F strike -32D Von Duprin
(Allegion)
1 Combination Lock with Deadbolt 8555-102 Sargent &
Extension Greenleaf
SHW-20
QUAN. ITEM MODEL & NOTES
3* Hinge-NRP (non- BB1199-32D NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" Hager

removable pin)
Combination Lock
1 Interchangeable Core 32-0201 – 26-00S Medeco
1 Emergency Switch RCI-904P Rutherford
Controls
1 Wall Stop 407CVX Ives

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SHW-21A
3 Hinge-NRP (non- Swing Clear BB 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" Maars Living

removable pin) NRP Walls, Horizon
For Full Laminated
Glass Doors
1 Lock Set ML2030 x NSM x 26D with Strike Corbin Russwin
{626}
1 Interchangeable Core 32-0200-26D x CT-Z00 Medeco
& Mortise Cylinder

1 set Gasket Seals Maars Living
Walls, Horizon
END OF SECTION 087145

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Submittal Index
Spec Section: 087145 SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE
ITEM NO PARAGRAPH DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1.3.A GENERAL
1.3.A General submittal formatting requirements Noted
1 1.3.B Product Data
1.3.B Manufacturer's Catalog Data Attached
1.3.B Standard Color Chart / Finish Attached
2.2.A/ 2.2.B Hinges Attached
2.3 Mechanical Locks and Keys Attached
2.4 Cylinders, Core and Keys Attached
2.5 Key Control Accessories ‐ Stand Alone Key Cabinet To be submitted Separately
2.6 Power Assisted Operators Attached
2.7.B Manual Flush Bolts n/a
2.7.C Door Stops n/a
2.7.D Silencers Attached
2.8 Overhead Stops and Holders Attached
2.9 Thresholds, Weather Stripping and Seals Attached
2.9.C Smoke Seals Attached
2.9.D Astragals n/a
2.10 Acoustic Treatment n/a
2.11 Electromagnetic Door Holders Attached
‐ Construction Keys and cores will be supplied with the SHW set to
the project site.
‐ The final keying schedule will be submitted separately after the
approval of the FEBR Doors. PGI will coordinate with the ‐ OBO Site
2.12 Keying team to determine when to have a meeting regarding the keying
schedule and when the keying schedule needs to be submitted.
(2.12.B).
‐ The permanent cores will be submitted as described in paragraph
2.12.E
Included as part of the Hardware Data. Not being submitted
2.13 Finishes
separately
2.15 Fasteners Included at part of the Hardware. Not being submitted separately

2.15 Accessories ‐ Door Coat and Hat Hooks Attached
2 1.3.C Shop Drawings
Typical Shop Drawings for the pneumatic door operator is attached.
1.3.C Shop Drawings for pneumatic Power‐Assisted operators
The coordination drawings will be submitted under spec 013114.
3 1.3.D Hardware Schedule
1.3.D Hardware Schedule Attached
4 1.3.E Hardware Schedule Index
1.3.E Hardware Schedule Index Attached
1.3.F Keying Schedule
1.3.F Keying Schedule To be submitted later. See Remarks for paragraph 2.12 above.
5 1.3.G Wiring Diagrams
1.3.G Wiring Diagrams Attached
1.3.H Samples
Samples: If requested by COR, submit one sample of each
1.3.H requested item tagged with full description for coordination with Will be submitted if requested by the COR/PD.
the hardware schedule.
6 1.3.I Operating Instructions
1.3.I Operating / Installation Instructions Attached
1.3.J Templates
1.3.J Templates N/A ‐ FEBR Door and Frame are Factory Prepped
1.3.K Informational Submittals
1.3.K.1 1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. To be submitted later
1.3.K.2 2. Qualifications Data: Hardware Suppliers Qualification data. n/a
The requirement for an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)
does not apply to this submittal package. This submittal is
specifically for Security Hardware for FEBR doors. These are DS rated
FEBR door Assemblies. The supplier FDI and USBP hves several years
of experience in supplying this types of assemblies.
1.3.L Closeout Submittal
1.3.L Closeout Submittal To be Submitted Later
1.3.M Certification
1.3.M Certifications ‐ For Installations To be Submitted Later
Page 1 of 1
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4. SUBMITTAL
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Project Name: Kampala NOX/SPX 17001
Contract Number: SAQMMA-17-C-0319
Submittal Number 087145-009-00

Specs Section 087145
Paragraph Number 1.3.B
ITEM NO. 1
PRODUCT DATA
NOTES TO REVIEWER
1. This is a new submittal.
2. No Variation.
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 3 - Wall Mounted Switch - Schlage - 625-BL-H-DP
620/631 Series
Heavy-duty pushbuttons
Overview Features and benefits

Schlage pushbuttons are used to control the ingress and/or egress of a door. The §§ Pushbuttons are available in 1 1⁄4", 1 5⁄8", and
620 and 631 Series pushbuttons are easy to install and operate. Their standard and 2 3⁄4" sizes
narrow stile plates offer ultimate flexibility. The 620 to 631 Series have multiple button
§§ Two metal 1 1⁄4" button options: aluminum
configuration and finish options provide enhanced architectural appeal.
with engraved, painted red “PUSH TO EXIT”,
and red coated aluminum button with
Schlage 620 and 631 Series pushbuttons also offer significant installer-friendly
engraved “PUSH TO EXIT”
innovations such as screw terminal connections for the momentary action models and
easy-to-install L2/ILL optional PC board, offering backlit illumination for the cone with §§ 631 pushbutton available in 1 1⁄4" metal
green and red LEDs for monitoring purposes. Additional options include delayed action, button, single gang and narrow stile.
double pole double throw a heavy-duty plate with several architectural finishes and §§ Two models of metal 1 1⁄4" button: aluminum
extreme-duty pushbuttons. with engraved, painted red “PUSH TO EXIT”
and new red coated aluminum with engraved
“PUSH TO EXIT”
§§ Variety of colors and finishes available
Allegion, the Allegion logo, Schlage, and the Schlage logo are trademarks of Allegion plc, its subsidiaries and/or
affiliates in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Ordering information
621-GID-DA-SF-626 Selections correspond with the numbers to the left
1 Model 3 Options
Model
Button
Options
Finish
621 1 1⁄4" Button, single gang DA Delayed action (0-60 seconds)
623 1 5⁄8" Mushroom button, single gang AA Alternate action - maintained
625 2 3⁄4" Mushroom button, single gang DP Double pole double throw
631 1 1⁄4" Metal button, single gang (not available with DA option)
L2/ILL 3 LEDs - green/yellow/red concealed
2 Button
within opaque cone (not available
1 2 3 4 GID-EX Glow-in-the-dark “PUSH TO EXIT”
for 625/625-NS models)
GID-H Glow-in-the-dark handicapped symbol
NS Narrow stile - stainless steel plate
GID Glow-in-the-dark
(1 3⁄4" x 4 1⁄2")
RD-EX Red, “PUSH TO EXIT”
RD Red 4 Finish
GR-EX Green, “PUSH TO EXIT” SF-626 Satin chrome (standard)
GR Green SF-605 Bright brass
BL-H Blue, handicapped symbol SF-612 Satin bronze
BK Black SF-613 Oil satin bronze
AL-EX-RD Aluminum button red coated, engraved SF-625 Bright chrome
“PUSH TO EXIT” SF-1 White powder coat
AL-EX Aluminum button, engraved SF-2 Black powder coat
“PUSH TO EXIT”
AL Aluminum button
Note: Heavy-duty plate (HDP) 1⁄4" thick cast zinc standard
Button configurations Finishes
GID-EX GID-H GID RD-EX RD GR-EX GR BL-H BK
PUSH PUSH PUSH

621 TO TO TO
EXIT EXIT EX IT
PUSH PUSH PUSH SF-626 SF-605 SF-612 SF-613

623 TO TO TO Satin chrome Bright brass Satin bronze Oil rubbed bronze
EXIT EXIT EXIT
(standard)
PUSH PUSH
625 TO TO
EXIT EXIT
AL-EX AL AL-RD-EX
PUSH PUSH
621 TO TO
EXIT EXIT
SF-625 SF-1 SF-2
Bright chrome White powder Black powder
AL-EX AL AL-RD-EX
coat coat
PUSH PUSH
631 TO TO
EXIT EXIT
Multiple button configuration
1 1⁄4" Button 1 5⁄8" Mushroom button 2 3⁄4" Mushroom button 1 1⁄4" Metal button
About Allegion
Allegion (NYSE: ALLE) creates peace of mind by pioneering safety and security. As a
$2 billion provider of security solutions for homes and businesses, Allegion employs
more than 8,000 people and sells products in more than 120 countries across the
world. Allegion comprises 27 global brands, including strategic brands CISA®, Interflex®,
LCN®, Schlage® and Von Duprin®. For more, visit www.allegion.com.
© 2014 Allegion
003910, Rev. 08/14
www.allegion.com/us
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
MS1850S,
MS1850S, 11
Tag # 5 - Certified Forced Entry MS1850S-X5X
DEADLOCKS
Lock - Adams Rite - MS1850S Series MS®
Deadlocks
MS1850S-X5X
Series MS® Deadlocks
The MS1850S Series MS® Deadlock utilizes a laminated stainless steel
bolt to provide maximum security for a single leaf narrow stile aluminum
door. The MS1850S-X5X Series MS® Deadlock utilizes a laminated
stainless steel hookbolt to provide maximum security for a sliding
narrow stile aluminum door. Both are activated by a pivot mechanism. MS1850S-
X5X only
Function
A huge bolt of laminated stainless steel, nearly 3" long, activated by an uncomplicated
pivot mechanism, has made the basic MS1850S Series MS® Deadlock the standard
of the narrow stile aluminum door industry. The length of this bolt provides maximum
security for a single leaf door, even a very tall and flexible one or an installation
where the gap between the door and jamb is greater than it should be.
The MS1850S-X5X Series MS® Deadlock answers the security need of sliding narrow MS1850S
stile aluminum doors in commercial, industrial, and institutional buildings. The locking
mechanism is identical to the MS1850S Series MS Deadlock, except that the massive
laminated bolt is provided in a hook shape to resist the parting motion of sliding door
and jamb. The over-center maximum security (MS) locking action assures that forced
entry attempts to pry the door in any direction, up, down, or sideways will be defeated.
Special configuration: The 1850S-X2X Series Short Throw Deadlock
utilizes a laminated stainless steel short bolt, activated by a pivot
mechanism to secure a single leaf narrow stile aluminum door.
Operation
360° turn of key or thumbturn projects or retracts the counterbalanced bolt. Key
can be removed only when bolt is in a positively locked or unlocked position. Lock
accepts any standard 1" [25.4 mm] length, 1-5/32" [29.4 mm] diameter mortise cylinder
with MS® cam such as the 4036 Mortise Cylinder or thumbturn such as the 4066
Thumbturn, available separately. Lock accepts cylinder from either or both sides.
MS1850S-X5X
Copyright © 2018, Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc., an ASSA ABLOY Group

company. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without the
express written permission of Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. is prohibited.
Patent pending and/or patent assabloydss.com/patents 800.872.3267 800.232.7329 adamsrite.com
ARM-014-9/17 10027 S. 51st Street, Ste 102, Phoenix, Arizona 85044
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
12 MS1850S, All measurements are approximate and are provided for informational
purposes only. Refer to the product Installation Instructions.
MS1850S-X5X
DEADLOCKS
Series MS®
Deadlocks Features MS1850S-X5X: Hookbolt measures 5/8"
x 1-3/8" [15.9 mm x 34.9 mm] with 13/16"
[20.6 mm] throw. Hook shaped bolt repels
Backset
pry bar attempts to “spread” the door
7/8" [22.2 mm], 31/32" [24.6 mm], 1-1/8"
from its jamb or lift it off its track.
[28.6 mm], and 1-1/2" [38.1 mm]. 1850S-X2X
not available with 7/8" backset. 1850S-X2X: Short bolt measures 5/8"
x 1-3/8" x 2-3/8" [15.9 mm x 34.9 mm x
Case 60.3 mm] with 13/16" [20.6 mm] throw.
ARMORED FACEPLATE Measures 1" x 6" x depth [25.4 mm x 152.4 mm
1" X 6-7/8"
x depth], depth varies by backset (see table Standard Package
on left). Steel with corrosion-resistant plating. Individually boxed with faceplate and
FLAT MS1850S
mounting screws. Strike plates, cylinders
Faceplate and/or thumbturns available separately.
RADIUS MS1851S Measures 1" x 6-7/8" [25.4 mm x 174.6 mm].
Shipping Weight
Strike 1-1/2 lbs [0.68 kg].
HOW BACKSET See below for dimensions of strike slot which
IS MEASURED: RADIUS W/ WEATHERSTRIP
can be cut in metal jamb. Trim plate, box strike,
Options
MS1851SW
CYLINDER CL
and armored strike are available separately.
LH BEVEL MS1852S-X15
CL Bolt • “SCHOOLHOUSE” version, also available,
Eight-ply laminated stainless steel. is modified so that operation from inside
RH BEVEL MS1852S-X16
FLAT Center ply has alumina-ceramic core to is “unlock only”. This lock is handed and
defeat any hacksaw attack, including must be specified LH or RH. Specify
BACKSET “A”
CL rod-type “super” hacksaws. SCH1850S or SCH1850S-X5X Series.
7/8" 1-9/16" Same faceplate and backset options as
22mm 34.7mm MS1850S: Standard straight bolt measures
MS1850S and MS1850S-X5X Series.
RADIUS 31/32" 1-5/8" 5/8" x 1-3/8" x 2-7/8" [15.9 mm x 34.9 mm
24.6mm 41.3mm
x 73.0 mm] with 1-3/8" [34.9 mm] throw.
1-1/8" 1-25/32"
CL
28.6mm 45.2mm
1-1/2" 2-1/4"
BEVEL 38.1mm 57.2mm STILE
MS1850S MS1850S-X5X 1-19/3

40.5m
Dimensions Dimensions 1-19/32"

40.5mm 1-27
BACKSET 46.8
6-57/64"
6-57/64" 175mm
7/8" 5/8" 1" 7/8" 175mm 5/8" 1"
22.2mm 15.9mm 25.4mm 22.2mm 15.9mm 25.4mm
1-1/4"
31.8mm
“A” SHOWN WITH DIA. HOLE
FLAT FACEPLATE “A” SHOWN WITH
FLAT FACEPLATE
5/32" R
BACKSET MEASURED
AT CENTERLINE OF 4mm
11/32" BACKSET MEASURED
STILE NOSE 11/32" (4 PLCS.)
8.7mm AT CENTERLINE OF
7/32" 8.7mm 5/32" R STILE NOSE
5.6mm 4mm
(4 PLCS.)
1/4" 1-1/64"
6.4mm 25.8mm
6-13/16" 6-7/8"
173mm 174.6mm
6-13/16"
6-3/8" 173mm LOCK & STILE
13/32" CYLINDER
161.9mm 10.3mm
6"
152.4mm
6-7/8" 6-3/8"
161.9mm CYLINDER 11/16"
174.6mm LOCK & STILE 17.5mm
5/8"
6" 15.9mm
11/16" 2-3/16" STRIKE
152.4mm
17.5mm 55.6mm CUTOUT
1-13/32" 1-3/8" Strike

35.7mm 34.9mm Cutout 1/4"
6.4mm
13/16"
1" 20.6mm 1-15/16"
25.4mm 49.2mm
3-3/8" 59/64"
85.7mm 23.4mm
59/64"
23.4mm
1/4" 1/4"
6.4mm 6.4mm
UNCLASSIFIED
31.8mm
“A” SHOWN WITH UNCLASSIFIED DIA. HOLE
FLAT FACEPLATE
MS1850S, 13
MS1850S BACKSET MEASURED MS1850S-X5X
DEADLOCKS
11/32"
AT CENTERLINE OF
Series MS®
Stile Preparation Lock & Cylinder
STILE NOSE
8.7mm 5/32"
4mm R Deadlocks
Installation
(4 PLCS.)
1/4" 1-1/64"
6.4mm 25.8mm
6-13/16"
173mm STILE
6-3/8"
161.9mm
6"
152.4mm
6-7/8"
174.6mm LOCK & STILE CYLINDER
1-19/32"
40.5mm
BACKSET 11/16"
17.5mm
6-57/64" 1-3/8" Strike
175mm 1-13/32"
35.7mm 34.9mm Cutout
1-1/4"
31.8mm 1"
DIA. HOLE 25.4mm
3-3/8"
85.7mm
59/64" STILE
23.4mm
5/32"
4mm R 1/4"
6.4mm
(4 PLCS.)
1-19/32"
1-1/64" 40.5mm
25.8mm
BACKSET
1-27/32"
46.8mm LOCKFACE
6-57/64" 1-1/4"
/8" 175mm 31.8mm
6mm LOCK & STILE CYLINDER
7/8" 5/8" 1"
22.2mm 15.9mm 25.4mm DIA. HOLE
MS1850S-X5X
11/16"
17.5mm
“A” SHOWN WITH
Stile Preparation Lock & Cylinder

FLAT FACEPLATE
1-3/8" Strike
34.9mm Cutout 5/32" R
4mm
Installation
BACKSET MEASURED
1" 11/32" AT CENTERLINE OF (4 PLCS.)
25.4mm 7/32" 8.7mm STILE NOSE
5.6mm
3-3/8"
85.7mm
59/64" STILE 1-1/64"
23.4mm 25.8mm
6-7/8"
174.6mm
6-13/16"
173mm LOCK & STILE
13/32" CYLINDER
10.3mm
1-19/32"
40.5mm6-3/8"
161.9mm 11/16"
BACKSET 17.5mm
5/8"
1-27/32" 15.9mm
6" 2-3/16" STRIKE
46.8mm 152.4mm LOCKFACE 55.6mm CUTOUT
6-57/64" 1-1/4"
175mm 31.8mm
1" 1/4"
.4mm DIA. HOLE 6.4mm
13/16"
20.6mm 1-15/16"
49.2mm
59/64"
TE 23.4mm
5/32" R
4mm
ED
F (4 PLCS.) 1/4"
6.4mm
1-1/64"
25.8mm
8"
mm
LOCK & STILE CYLINDER
11/16"
17.5mm UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
14 MS1850S,
MS1850S-X5X
DEADLOCKS
Series MS®
Deadlocks
How to Order & Related Products

MS1850S, MS1850S-X5X Series MS® Deadlock: Specify quantity and the following information. Order related products separately.
PRODUCT NO. FACEPLATE BACKSET BOLT SHAPE HANDING FINISH
MS185 0S -2 1 0 -628
0S Flat 1 7/8" 1 Straight bolt 0 Non-Handed* 313 Dark Bronze Anodized
1S Radius 2 31/32" 5 Hookbolt 5 LH or RHR 335 Black Anodized
1SW Radius with
3 1-1/8" 6 RH or LHR 628 Clear Anodized
weatherstrip
2S Bevel 4 1-1/2"
3S Without faceplate,
without strike plate
*Any flat or radius faceplate, except Schoolhouse. Select handing for bevel faceplate only.
1850S-X2X Series Short Throw Deadlock: Specify quantity and the following information. Order related products separately.
MODEL FACEPLATE BACKSET BOLT SHAPE HANDING FINISH
185 0S -2 2 0 -628
0S Flat 2 31/32" 2 Short Throw 0 Non-Handed* 313 Dark Bronze Anodized
1S Radius 3 1-1/8" 5 LH or RHR 335 Black Anodized
2S Bevel 4 1-1/2" 6 RH or LHR 628 Clear Anodized

3S Without faceplate,
without strike plate
*Any flat or radius faceplate, except Schoolhouse. Select handing for bevel faceplate only.
RELATED — MS1850S & MS1850S-X5X

When purchasing this product, please consider the following related products, available separately:
ACCESSORIES CYLINDERS TRIM SPECIAL ORDER OPTIONS
4015 Threshold Bolt, 4016 Header Standard 1" length, 1-5/32” diameter 3090, 3090P, 3090C, A100 Series Schoolhouse function
Bolt for multi-point locking. mortise cylinder with MS® cam such Keyless Entry, 4550 Deadlock Lever available as special order.
4085 Header Bolt for pairs of doors as 4036 Mortise Cylinder, 4066 4089 Exit Indicator
Thumbturn; MS4043 Cylinder Guard
4000, 4001, MS4002 Deadlock Strikes
Lock mounting accessories and options
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
82 Interchangeable Cores
Medeco Core and Cylinder for Lock Tags 5, 14, 14C, 14H,
20, 37, 37A
Interchangeable Core See SHW Schedule for Lock and corresponding cylinder and
core models
FEATURES Medeco3 BiLevel Medeco X4 CLIQ Medeco XT
Utility patented key control provides protection

from unauthorized duplication of keys • • • • •
UL437 Listing and BHMA Certification provide validation
of high security from recognized, independent testing laboratories •
•
Triple locking principle provides pick resistance and
large numbers of combinations for master keying
flexibility to accommodate systems of virtually any size
Hardened steel inserts in the cylinder face and hardened steel driver
pins provide proven drill resistance •
Solid brass construction provides high quality
and long cylinder life • • •
Nickel plated pins designed to provide exceptional wear
resistance (Medeco X4 solid Nickel) • • •
• • • • •
Retrofits into virtually any manufacturers’ locksets with a wide
selection of interchangeable cams to fit various manufacturers’
mortise series hardware for cost effective improved security
• • •
Ability to key with non-interchangeable core cylinders, including
rim and mortise, knob style for Medeco BiLevel cost effective
system flexibility
High security and key control may be incorporated in a

single system for cost effective system flexibility • • •
Keys may be integrated with Hybrid proximity head
for greater system retrofit • • • •
Medeco3 Premium High Security Medeco3 BiLevel Patented Key Control
For effective mechanical protection against most forms of Medeco3 BiLevel cylinders may be incorporated into a master key
attack as well as protection against unauthorized duplicate system with Medeco3 high security, offering protection against all
keys, Medeco3 cylinders are recommended. Security features types of attack where needed, and patented key control cylinders
including hardened steel components, pins that must be for areas requiring less protection. BiLevel cylinders offer patented
elevated, rotated, and interact with both a sidebar and a slider, and control against unauthorized duplication of keys without the
additional pick resistant features make Medeco3 the additional security features protecting against force or
cylinder of choice to protect people, property and information. surreptitious attack.
Medeco X4 Patented Key Control Loss & Liability Control

Medeco X4 cylinders offer patented control against unauthorized Many of the cylinders in this section are also available with an
duplication of keys without the additional security eCylinder Loss & Liability Control Solution. See the eCylinder
features protecting against force or surreptitious attack. Section for more details.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Large Format Interchangeable Cores 83
Large Format
Interchangeable Cores
Offering increased security with rapid combination changes, interchangeable
core cylinders enable quick and easy cylinder changes by non-technical
personnel by using a special control key to remove the cylinder (core)
from the lock housing. A core with a new combination can then be inserted,
which in effect rekeys the lock. All of this can be done without having to
take the lock apart, which reduces the expense of calling outside service
personnel to perform routine lock rekeys. These cylinder/core combinations
are often used on doors of high-turnover businesses, like fast-food or
manufacturing environments, where rapid rekeying is often desirable. Medeco3’s patented high security
technology provides protection against unauthorized duplication of keys, along with hardened inserts to
resist drilling and features that protect against other types of attack.
Patented Key Control Technical Information:

Protects against unauthorized duplication of • ANSI A156.30 Level A certification assures patent
your keys. protected key control and physical strength
• ANSI A156.5 Grade 1 certification assures consistent
Uses Existing Hardware quality for heavy use applications
Medeco offers the largest selection of retrofit Large • 32 Series are available in 5 and 6 Pin versions
Format Interchangeable Cores (LFIC) that reduce
cost by eliminating the need to replace your existing
• Solid brass construction provides high quality and
hardware. long cylinder life
• Nickel plated pins provide exceptional wear resistance
Quickly Change Cores and additional hardened stainless steel pins provide
drill resistance
Provides quick and easy cylinder changes in the
event keys are lost or stolen. • Ability to key with non-interchangeable core cylinders,
including rim & mortise and knob style for cost
Protection From Physical Attack effective system flexibility
Medeco3 LFIC cylinders are UL 437 listed and use Applications:
hardened stainless steel inserts in the cylinder face Office buildings, Universities, Apartments, Perimeter
to provide drill and pick resistance resistance. Doors, Schools and Hospitals.
Special Angle Cut Keys Warranty:
Requires a special key cutting machine and access Warranted for two (2) years against manufacturer’s
to Medeco specific blanks, available in a variety of defects. See Medeco’s limited warranty for full details.
restrictions to support every need.
Finishes:
Picking and Bumping Protection Available in all standard finishes to match with
Medeco cylinders use a sidebar that prevent the key
3
existing hardware.
from rotating until it is elevated, rotated and aligned
in the correct position. This feature protects against Available Key Technologies:
bumping and picking attacks. Mechanical: eCylinder:
– Medeco3 – Medeco3 CLIQ
– Medeco3 BiLevel – Medeco CLIQ
– Medeco X4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
84 Large Format Interchangeable Cores
Large Format Interchangeable Core

Description Part Number Medeco3 BiLevel Medeco X4 eCylinder
Yale® Large Format Interchangeable 310100 (P)

Core, 6 Pin (Masterkey upcharges •
apply) 310100 (S)
6 Pin Control Keyblank for 31-0100

KYB XX6611
cylinders
6 Pin Core for 7 Pin Yale® Large Format 310100A (P)

Interchangeable Core Housing •
(Masterkey upcharges apply) 310100A (S)
7 Pin Control Keyblank for high

KYB XX7600
security 31-0100A cylinders
7 Pin Control keyblank for KeyMark

KYB XX7611
31-0100A cylinders
6 Pin Interchangeable Core Insert

Construction Core (Yale® Style)
310100CC BI R1
Cut keys provided separately – 12 keys
Maximum
320101 (P)
5 Pin Large Format Interchangeable
Core (Masterkey upcharges apply)
320101 (S)
320101H (P)
Core for Simplex® Unican® 1000-2m
Manufactured Before 2/10/92
320101H (S)
(Masterkey upcharges apply)
320201 (P) simplex lock
Core (Masterkey upcharges apply) •
320201 (S)
320201H (P)
Core for Simplex® Unican® 1000-2m
Manufactured Before 2/10/92
320201H (S)
6 Pin Large Format Removable Core
Insert Construction Core Cut keys sold 320201CC BI R1
separately – 12 keys maximum
6 Pin Large Format Hotel Function 321201 (P)

Interchangeable Core (Masterkey
upcharges apply) 321201 (S)
6 Pin Large Format Interchangeable 321201D (P)

Core Hotel Function with Extended
Plug Face (Masterkey upcharges apply) 321201D (S)
6 Pin Large Format Interchangeable 324201 (P)

Core with Extended Plug Face
(Masterkey upcharges apply) 324201 (S)
**Refer to the eCylinder section for more detail on specific technologies available and pricing. Technologies are represented by the following letters:
T = Medeco 3, S = Medeco3 CLIQ, J = Medeco3 BiLevel, W = Biaxial, V = Medeco Biaxial CLIQ, K = Medeco KM, N = Medeco X4, C = Medeco CLIQ,
“-” = Original, Z = Medeco Original KW CLIQ, G = Medeco XT ***See key section for surcharges for custom coined cut keys or special stamping requirements.
Note: (P) refers to Pinned and (S) to Sub-Pinned at the end of each part string in the price book.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Large Format Interchangeable Core

6 Pin Emergency Keyblank for 321201 KYB XX6620 XX 05

Core (Schlage®) (Masterkey upcharges •
apply) 322201 (S)
7 Pin Control Keyblank for 322201 KYB XX7931 XX 05

Core (Corbin Russwin®) (Masterkey

Core (Sargent®), (Masterkey upcharges
apply) 322401 (S)

Core (Corbin Russwin®), (Masterkey
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
LFIC Mortise Cylinders

310101 (P)
6 Pin Mortise Cylinder for Yale®
310101 (S)
310101A (P)
7 Pin Mortise Cylinder Assembly for
Yale® (Masterkey upcharges apply)
310101A (S)
320100 (P)
5 Pin 1" Mortise Cylinder Assembly
320100 (S)
320200 (P) FE LOCK

6 Pin 1 1/4" Mortise Cylinder Assembly
320200 (S)
6 Pin LFIC Mortise Cylinder Assembly 321200 (P)

Hotel Function (Masterkey upcharges
apply) 321200 (S)
6 Pin Mortise Cylinder Master 321350 (P)

Corbin Russwin® Ring Size Assembly
(Masterkey upcharges apply) 321350 (S)
6 Pin LFIC Mortise Cylinder Assembly 324200 (P)

with Raised Plug Face (Masterkey
325200 (P)
6 Pin 1 1/2" LFIC Mortise Cylinder
Assembly (Masterkey upcharges apply)
325200 (S)
325400 (P)
325400 (S)
325500 (P)
CORBIN RUSSWIN
6 Pin 2" LFIC Mortise Cylinder
325500 (S)
325300 (P)
325300 (S)
325600 (P)
6 Pin 2 5/8" LFIC Mortise Assembly
325600 (S)
325700 (P)
6 Pin 3" LFIC Mortise Assembly
325700 (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
LFIC Mortise Housings

5 Pin Mortise Cylinder Housing 320175
6 Pin Mortise Cylinder Housing 320275
6 Pin Jumbo Mortise Cylinder Housing

for Corbin® Russwin® Master Ring 321375
Cylinders
1 1/2" Mortise Cylinder Housing

325275
for 32-5200

325475
for 32-5400
2" Mortise Cylinder Housing

325575
for 32-5500

325375
for 32-5300

325675
for 32-5600
3" Mortise Cylinder Housing

325775
for 32-5700
6 Pin 1 3/8" Mortise Cylinder Housing

310175
(Yale®)
7 Pin Mortise Cylinder Housing (Yale®) 310175A
2 1/4” Mortise Cylinder Housing

315375
(Yale®)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
LFIC Rim Cylinders

6 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly for Yale®, 310102H (P)

Horizontal Tailpiece (Masterkey
upcharges apply) 310102H (S)
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly for 310102V (P)

Yale®,Vertical Tailpiece (Masterkey
upcharges apply) 310102V (S)
7 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly for 310104H (P)

Yale®,Horizontal Tailpiece (Masterkey
7 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly for 310104V (P)

Yale®,Vertical Tailpiece (Masterkey
upcharges apply) 310104V (S)
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly with
320300H (P)
Horizontal Tailpiece and Staked Tailpiece
Retainer for Thin Door Applications
320300H (S)
320300V (P)
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly, Vertical
Tailpiece (Masterkey upcharges apply)
320300V (S)
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly, 320400H (P) PANIC

DEVICE
Horizontal Tailpiece (Masterkey
320400V (P)
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly, Vertical
Tailpiece (Masterkey upcharges apply)
320400V (S)
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Assembly with Lazy 320600 (P)

Motion Tailpiece (Masterkey upcharges
apply) 320600 (S)
320700 (P)
6 Pin Lazy Motion Rim Cylinder
320700 (S)
6 pin Rim Cylinder with Sargent 320405H (P)

mounting holes (Masterkey upcharges
apply) 320405H (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
LFIC Rim Cylinder Housings

Description Part Number Price
7 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing (Yale®),

310153H
Horizontal Tailpiece
7 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing (Yale®),

310153V
Vertical Talpiece
6 Pin 1 1/2" Rim Cylinder Housing

310375H
(31 series for Yale®), Horizontal Tailpiece
6 Pin 1 1/2" Rim Cylinder Housing

310375V
(31 series for Yale), Vertical Tailpiece
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing - 31 Series with

310375S
Sargent® mounting hole spacing
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing, Horizontal Tailpiece 320375H
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing, Vertical Tailpiece 320375V
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing, Horizontal Tailpiece 320475H
6 Pin Rim Housing,Vertical Tailpiece 320475V
6 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing - 32 Series with

320477H
Sargent® mounting hole spacing
5 Pin Rim Cylinder Housing with

320675
Lazy Motion Tailpiece
6 Pin Rim Lazy Motion Cylinder Housing 320775
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 6, 6A, 7, 7A- LCN pnuematic Operator Letter
FDI FABRICATION
DESIGNS, INC.
7463 New Ridge Road Suite A, Hanover, MD 21076
May 9, 2019
RE Pneumatic operators
Fabrication Designs provides doors certified by the US Department of state. The LCN
4840 closer has proven to be compatible to our door weight due to minimal pull required.
Under 3 lbs. Our products are acceptable by the US Department of State Guidelines.
Automatic door operators for handicap compliance have been fully designed by and
coordinated with the hardware supplier for the width and weight of each applicable door,
that the operator controls and equipment are sized adequately given the location of the
control box and its relationship to the door, and is fully compliant with accessibility fire
protection requirements (for doors that are part of the fire egress system) of the OBO
Building Code.”
Sincerely,
Keith Eustace
President
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 6, 6A, 7A- Pneumatic Closer & Acc. - LCN - 4840 - 7910 - 7981
4840 SERIES
FEATURES
The 4840 AUTO EQUALIZER™ is
PARALLEL ARM (PUSH SIDE) MOUNTING LCN’s pneumatically powered MULTI-
DOOR solution. This low-energy
automatic operator provides easy
access for people with disabilities,
or the elderly. Designed primarily
for manual opening applications
that occasionally require automatic
opening.
Q Multi-Door Solution.
Q Utilizes a 10,000,000 Cycle Heavy
Duty Door Closer.
4840 with EDA arm and 459 Door Loop
Q Quiet, Efficient & Reliable.
Q Requires Control Boxes with integral

Q Ideal for multi-door applications since cost per door leaf decrease significantly as compressor or control box using
the number of door leaves increases. auxiliary air supply.
Q Standard, plate mounted 4840 Series closer shipped with EXTRA DUTY arm, Q Guard Rails/Safety Mats not
metal cover and a wood and machine screw pack. See 4840 Series page 24-25 required.
for options.
Q Meets ADA requirements (power mode).
Q Installation requires use of either DOOR LOOP-459 or TRANSFER HINGE- 460, The 4840 Series is UL and cUL228
see page 25 in this section for details. listed and meets the provisions of
Q Cdc"hôZYXna^cYZgh[dg^ciZg^dgYddghid)+ðVcYZmiZg^dgYddghid (+ð# ANSI Standards A117.1, A156.19, and
Q Non-Handed. the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Q Requires additional system components. See CONTROL BOX pages 27-29 and
ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES, pages 122-137.
Q Standard or optional custom powder coated finish, end caps are black.
Q Optional plated finish on cover, arm, and fasteners.
MOUNTING FINISH COVER CYLINDER *ARM FUNCTION

)
DP OPE OR
PA B (P IDE)
CO LEL IDE
EX R (D LE)
CU DU LE)
HO OP *
CE RM
T
ER ITY
G
S
ED AT
AM LL S
NG OP
LD ERA
SH
IN
H
CH
TR OU
N- DE
SH TY
RA US
O
ED
A
GU D (S
IL
N
P J (PU
CE D
T
CU
PL ER C
PO SIB
SP N-S
NO AN
IT
AC IZE
AL
B
R
M IC
SW
DA
AM
LA
AL
S
L
A
D
-
-
N-
AS
AT
W
AN
W
RI
PJ
ET
S
NO
PO
PL
ST
RE
TO
TO
AVAILABLE Meets ADA requirements (power mode).

NOT AVAILABLE * See individual series for maximum manual opening.
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
23 www.allegion.com/us
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4840 SERIES
MOUNTING DETAILS
PARALLEL ARM (PUSH

SIDE) MOUNTING
MAXIMUM OPENING
Maximum power opening is 90° with all
arms.
Maximum manual opening is 105° with

EDA or SPRING CUSH arms.
Maximum manual opening is 100° with

CUSH-N-STOP arm.
NOTE: For CUSH-N-STOP or SPRING CUSH arm

installations with maximum opening less than listed
above, consult factory for Special Template.
Butt Hingesh]djaYcdiZmXZZY*ð&',bb^cl^Yi]#
Q Auxiliary Stop is recommended when CUSH-N-STOP or SPRING CUSH arms
are not used.
Q Clearance[dg:96dg8JH=h]dZh^h*"&$'ð&)%bb[gdbYddg[VXZ#
Q Top Railb^c^bjb)"&$-ð&%*bb#+ðb^c^bjbidegVâ[dghXgZlcdiid
show in glass.
Q Head Frame (flush) requires PA SHOE ADAPTER, 4840-419.
Q Stop Widthb^c^bjb&ð'*bb#
Q Blade Stop XaZVgVcXZgZfj^gZh&$'ð&(bb7A69:HIDEHE68:G!)-)%"+&#
Q System Diagram See “AUTOMATIC OPERATORS” section pages 7-8 for typical
system wiring, and pages 27-29 for electrical and pneumatic data for control
boxes.
Options
Q CUSH or SPRING CUSH arms.
Special Templates
Customized installation templates
or products may be available
to solve unusual applications.
Contact LCN Product Support
for assistance.
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4840 SERIES
ACCESSORIES
CYLINDERS 3971
CYLINDER ONLY, 4841-3971
Standard, non-handed, cast iron cylinder.
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, 4841-3071

Standard, non-handed, cast iron cylinder and mounting plate. 3071
COVERS
72MC
COVER, 4840-72MC
Standard, non-handed metal cover with black end caps.
ARMS
EXTRA DUTY ARM, 4840-3077EDA 3077EDA
Standard, non-handed parallel arm features forged solid steel main
arm and forearm for potentially abusive installations.
CUSH-N-STOP ARM, 4840-3077CNS

Optional, non-handed parallel arm features forged solid steel main
arm and forearm with stop in soffit shoe. 3077CNS
SPRING CUSH ARM, 4840-3077SCNS

Optional, non-handed parallel arm for abusive applications features
forged solid steel main arm and forearm with spring loaded stop in
soffit shoe.
3077SCNS
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4840 SERIES
ACCESSORIES
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 30 61
CUSH SHOE SUPPORT, 4840-30
Provides anchorage for fifth screw used with EDA and CUSH arms,
l]ZgZgZkZVa^haZhhi]Vc("&$&+ð,-bb#
BLADE STOP SPACER, 4840-61

GZfj^gZYidadlZgeVgVaaZaVgbh]dZidXaZVg&$'ð&(bb
blade stop.
419
PA FLUSH PANEL ADAPTER, 4840-419
Provides horizontal mounting surface for parallel arm shoe on single
rabbeted or flush frame.
DOOR LOOP KIT, 4840-459

Surface mounted, flexible metal loop transfers pressurized air via 459
pneumatic tubing from frame to closer end cap. Extra caps allow
tubing to run on frame surface or concealed in the frame.
PNEUMATIC TRANSFER HINGE, 4840-460

Transfers pressurized air via pneumatic tubing from frame to door leaf
for fully concealed installations. Preparation of a raceway is required 460
from the hinge stile of the door to the top rail for concealment of the
pneumatic tubing within the door leaf.
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
4840 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TABLE OF SIZES HOW-TO-ORDER
Non-sized 4841 cylinder is adjustable from size 1 through size 5 and is 4840 SERIES CLOSERS
shipped set to size 3. Closing power of 4841 closers may be increased 1. SPECIFY FINISH
50%. Standard Powder Coat __________
Aluminum, Dark Bronze, Statuary,
Light Bronze, Black, Brass.
EXTERIOR (and VESTIBULE) DOOR WIDTH
24" 30" 36" 42" Closer will be shipped with:
610mm 762mm 914mm 1067mm - STANDARD CYLINDER,
size 3 size 4 size 5 - STANDARD METAL COVER,
4841 - EXTRA DUTY ARM,
Minimum - WOOD and MACHINE SCREW PACK,
Door unless options listed below are selected.
Width
CLOSER OPTIONS
INTERIOR DOOR WIDTH FINISH
24" 34" 38" 48" 54" Custom Powder Coat (RAL) _________________
610mm 864mm 965mm 1219mm 1372mm Plated Finish, US_____________________________
size 2 size 3 size 4 size 5
ARMS
4841 CUSH-N-STOP (CUSH)
Minimum SPRING CUSH (SCUSH)
Door SCREW PACK
Width TB*, Wood & Machine Screw (TBWMS)
HeZX^[nYddgi]^X`cZhh^[di]Zgi]Vc&"($)ð#
Indicates recommended range of door width for closer size. INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
Cush Shoe Support, 4840-30
NOTE: Minimum door width 24" (610 mm). Blade Stop Spacer, 4840-61
PA Flush Panel Adapter, 4840-419
Door Loop Kit, 4840-459
Pneumatic Transfer Hinge, 4840-460
SPECIAL TEMPLATE
ST-_________
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
7900 SERIES CONTROL BOXES

CONTROL BOXES
Heavy duty, surface mounted control box contains one or two electrically controlled pneumatic circuits. Air filtration, pneumatic
regulation, and system timing is performed by the control box. 7980 Series control boxes also contain a built-in air pump to power the
system. Each pneumatic circuit can be adjusted for a hold open time up to 30 seconds. Output air pressure can be adjusted to precisely
tailor system to individual door requirements.
Pneumatic connections use standard barbed fittings and 925 tubing from the compressor to the control box to the operator. A package of
barbed tee and butt connectors are supplied with each control box to simplify installations. Consult LCN for details.
Other than a semi-annual inspection of the air filter assembly and muffler, no periodic system maintenance is required.
7901 AND ES7901 CONTROL BOX TIMER

For single door applications or independent control of single ADJUST
WHEEL
door in multiple door systems. Two door leaves can be

operated, if they are activated simultaneously. The single * FILTER
pneumatic circuit accepts Normally Open (N.O.) inputs from

hardwired or RF (wireless) actuator/receiver combinations. EARTH
The 7901 control box requires a separate compressor. 5 AMP
GROUND
FUSE ONLY
AIR PRESSURE
REGULATOR
KNOB
AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE
INSTALL BOXWITH SIX TAPCON

MANUAL CONCRETE SCREWS - 3/16 x 1 1/4
OVERRIDE DRILL 5/32 HOLE 1 1/4" DEEP
WITH CARBIDE TIPPED CONCRETE BIT
A B
A
7902 AND ES7902 CONTROL BOX

For independent operation of two door or four door leaves, TIMER
ADJUST
if pairs are actuated simultaneously. Two independent WHEEL
LED LED
pneumatic circuits accept Normally Open (N.O.) inputs from * FILTER
hardwired or RF (wireless) actuator/receiver combinations.

Sequential operation (add suffix “S”) is available for 7902.
EARTH
The 7902 control box requires a separate compressor. GROUND
AIR PRESSURE
REGULATOR
KNOB
AIR
PRESSURE
GAUGE
MANUAL
OVERRIDE
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
7900 SERIES CONTROL BOXES

7981 AND ES7981 CONTROL BOX A
Self-contained control box/compressor combination for single

door leaf applications. The single pneumatic circuit accepts
Normally Open (N.O.) inputs from hardwired or RF (wireless)
actuator/receiver combinations. The 7981 control box does not
require a separate compressor.
AIR
FILTER
7982 AND ES7982 CONTROL BOX

Self-contained control box/compressor combination for
independent or simultaneous operation of two door leaves.
Two independent pneumatic circuit accepts Normally Open
(N.O.) inputs from hardwired or RF (wireless) actuator/
receiver combinations. The 7982 control box does not require a
separate compressor. Sequential operation (add suffix “S”)
is available for 7982 control boxes.
Air
Filter
PHONE 877-671-7011
FAX 800-248-1460
4/15 009426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
941
Tag # 7A - Door Control Package - AES - 941
ADA Door Control Module

Integrates Door Opener with
AES 900 Door Control System
The AES 941 Door Control Package is a single, flexible Key Benefits
solution that integrates “ADA” automatic door openers into • Single solution for ADA
the AES 900 Door Control System. The package consists of doors
one 941-M Control Module and one 941-R Door Controller
• Saves space at guard post
Interface. The parts work in tandem to provide an easy-to-
- uses a single slot in the
integrate and fast-to-install system. AES 900 Rack
• Day / Night mode selection
• The 941-M Door Control Module is very
similar to the widely used 940 Door Control enables / disables door
Module. It fits the same footprint, allowing for opener
backward and forward compatibility. The 941 • Built-in safety disables the
provides identical switches, indicators and door opener when the
operation so that retraining is minimized. The door is locked
added ADA door functions are co-located on
the control module and are simple to operate. • Flexibility to adapt to site
The classic functions include control of the and security requirements.
strike lock, magnetic lock, and emergency
override. Additionally a guard can also operate • Relay module provides
the ADA automatic door pump remotely. The pump wiring, plus ingress
guard also controls day / night mode operation and egress switch connec-
of the automatic door closer. Up to eight (8) tion to save wiring time
AES 941-M modules may be mounted in one
• Relay interfaces include
(1) AES 900 Rack.
electrical box for quick
mounting.
• The 941-R Relay Interface is in- • Multiple options for
stalled at or near the door for easy ingress, egress
wiring. It also provides inputs for ADA
door opener switches and provides full • Multiple control locations
or limited control for egress / ingress. may be installed
The 941-R includes it’s own case to stay
isolated from the door opener, providing
a clear dividing line between security
and facility functions.
• The 941-R2 Relay Interface includes
2 relay cards in a single box to control
dual doors. Each relay card is controlled by separate 941-M Door
Control Modules.
AES Corporation
Call 1-800-237-6387
285 Newbury Street • Peabody, MA 01960 USA
Tel +1-978-535-7310 • Fax +1-978-535-7313
http://www.aes-security.com
Copyright AES Corporation 2013—All Rights Reserved
941.P 07/10/2013 4.0941 (1/2)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Specifications
AES 941-M Door Control Module AES 941-R Relay Interface:

Dimensions: 5.125” H x 1.75” W x 3.5” D (approx) Case Size, Type 8 x 8 x 4”D (approx), NEMA 1, with knockouts
Mounting: Fits into standard slot of AES 900 Door Control Rack Relay Card Size: Relay Card, 4.75”W x 3”D x 3”H (approx)
Operative Voltage: 24VDC, use AES 726, 727 or 780 Supply Power: 24VDC Control Voltage
Switches: Inputs/Outputs:
• Access Push Button Switch, releases strike, momentary • Door Opener Pump Cut Out, Molex connector
• Magnetic Lock Toggle Switch, 3 position • Terminal Strip, 1 to 8
- Up = Override Emergency Lock Down • Trigger to Door Opener, terminals 7+8
- Center = Locks Magnetic Lock, overrides ADA pump • ADA Door Ingress/Egress Wall Buttons, 3 Options provided:
- Down = Releases Magnetic Lock - Option A, Switch activates latch and door opener;
• ADA Access Push Button Switch: momentary - timer opens latch first, then triggers pump
- releases strike and triggers door opener - Option B, Switch activates pump only
- timer opens latch first, and holds latch while door opens - Option C, Switch activates pump only if latch is released by 941M
• ADA Day/Night Mode Switch: push-on, push-off Hold Timer Option, Jumper: enables latch hold for 2-3 seconds
- activates ADA Access Push Button Terminals:
Indicators: • Barrier Blocks
• Access Indicators (on Access Push Button) • Molex Connector for 110/220VAC opener cut out
- Red Lamp: Emergency Lock Status, On = Lock Engaged
- Yellow Lamp: Door Status, On = Door Open AES 941-R2 Relay Interface:
• Day/Night Mode Indicators (On Opener Control Switch) Similar to 941-R, but with two (2) relay cards in a single
- Red LED: On = Day Mode enclosure; saves space and time when connecting to dual door
Terminals: Molex Connector, plugs into mating 900 rack connector opener configurations
Case Size, Type: 10 x 8 x 4”D (approx), NEMA 1, with knockouts
Other Specifications: Same as 941-R above.
Ordering:
AES Corporation AES 941-PKG - ADA Door Control Package,
285 Newbury Street • Peabody, MA 01960 USA includes one 941-M and one 941-R
Tel +1-978-535-7310 • Fax +1-978-535-7313
AES 941-PKG2, ADA Door Control Package,
http://www.aes-security.com
includes two 941-M’s and one 941-R2
AES 941-M, ADA Door Control Module Only
AES 941-R, ADA Door Opener Interface Only
AES 941-R2, ADA Door Opener Dual Interface Only
Copyright AES Corporation 2013—All Rights Reserved
941.P 07/10/2013 4.0941 (2/2)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 8 - Electric Strike - Folger Adam - 310-2-3_4
Application
These electric strikes are used with bored locks,
mortise locks* and mortise exit devices.
310-2 3/4OB
310-2 3/4
310-2 3/4U
310-3-1
310-2
300 Series
Industrial grade electric strikes

for use with cylindrical locks,
mortise locks* and mortise exit devices
Applications
310-2 310-2 3/4U

For a 1/2” or 5/8” throw latchbolt (without For use with a pre-assembled or unit lock
deadbolt) on single and pairs of doors • 3/4” U keeper standard
• 1/2” keeper standard
310-2-3/4 310-3-1
For a 3/4” throw latchbolt (without deadbolt) For a lockset with both a 3/4” throw latchbolt and a
on single doors 1” throw deadbolt
• 3/4” keeper standard • Deadbolt must be retracted manually
• Position of block within cavity is
310-2 3/4OB adjustable for RH and LH applications
For a pair of doors, without a door coordinator, • 1” keeper standard
which are equipped with a lock having a 3/4”
throw latchbolt (without deadbolt)
• 3/4” keeper standard
*Note: These products will require relocation of the center line when used with mortise locks.
Consult HES customer support regarding use with Best 40 Series.
3 www.hesinnovations.com
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Specifications Optional Features

• UL 10C fire-rated, 3 hour single door (fail secure only) • Fail Safe
310-2
• UL 10C fire-rated, 3 hour double door (fail secure only) • LCBMA - Latchbolt & Locking Cam Monitor
• CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104) fire door conformant with Auxiliary Switch (all except 310-2 3/4OB)
• UL1034, burglary-resistant listed
• ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1
• DOD approved Accessories
• New York City accepted • 152 - Universal mounting tabs
• NFPA-252 fire door conformant • 310-2-3 - Strike latch guard (astragal)
310-2 3/4
• ASTM-E152 fire door conformant • 2001-1 - Wire-in bridge rectifier
• 2001M - Plug-in bridge rectifier
• 2004M - ElectroLynx® adapter
Electrical
• 2005M - SMART Pac IITM
• .51 Amps @ 12VDC continuous duty
• 2006M - Plug-in buzzer
• .25 Amps @ 24VDC continuous duty
Standard Features Finishes
310-2 3/40B
• Tamper resistant, heavy-duty construction • 630 - Satin stainless steel finish
• Constructed entirely of stainless steel for strength • 605 - Bright brass finish
and corrosion resistance • 606 - Satin brass finish
• Static strength 1,500 lbs. • 612 - Satin bronze finish
• Dynamic strength 70 ft-lbs. • 613 - Bronze toned finish
• Endurance rating 500,000 cycles • 629 - Bright stainless steel finish
• Horizontally adjustable keeper to allow for door and
310-2 3/4U
frame misalignment
• 3/4” keeper depth (310-2 3/4 and 310-2 3/4OB)
• 3/4” U keeper depth (310-2 3/4U)
• 1/2” keeper depth (310-2)
• 1” keeper depth (310-3-1)
• Non-handed
• Fail Secure (standard)
• Plug-in connector
• Five year limited warranty
310-3-1
UNCLASSIFIED
Customer Support 800.626.7590 4
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 10, 10D

- Closer - LCN 4040XP
ÂÃÂÃÄÅ&
ÆÇÈÉÇÊ
À]gÁsv]t
¿Z]&jdjdËÌ&ot&ºÍ½Ît&q[tÁ&ÏsvgÐm]&g\Ï&fm]hoÐm]&Z]gwÑ&ÏsÁÑ&pm[t]v&Ï]ton\]Ï&f[v&o\tÁoÁsÁo[\gm&
g\Ï&[ÁZ]v&Ï]qg\Ïo\n&ZonZ&Ávgffop&gYYmopgÁo[\tl
ÒÇÈÓÉÔÉÕÖÓÉ×ØÊ ÙSWÚÛ&Ü&Ý&ÞPßà&ÞÜáâãäå&æN&ÜçOå&ÞQÞå&Üçç&èRéS& Ò×3ÇÈ e&"$ý#ü50&4ý%'ý!'

ßWVU&ßêSWëå&ìÛÛUí&îÞÞ&Ý&îéë&ÞïÛSðñWT&ÞñU e&ìÛUWVå&4êUðRTWV
0×òó&Ò×ØÊÓÈôÕÓÉ×Ø e&OWíU &àSRT&îRÚë )ÖÊÓÇØÇÈÊ 4ÿ$5&6ÿýþü%+&ý%'&ý77ü%+&45!ÿ7#&846&9&
e&õéV V&ORïêVÛïÛTU&îÛWSðTXí :×ôØÓÉØ0 %ü%+ÿ&8""$$&4ü'ÿ90&$7&(ýþ#&8""#-&4ü'ÿ90&
e&ö ÷öøùú&ûüýþÿÿ!&"ü#$% "ý!ý$$ÿ$&+!þ&8""#-&4ü'ÿ9
e&&ø!ú& ûüýþÿÿ!&û$"#$ÿ&%ÿý&!ÿýÿ'&
"ü%ü$%&($"!%ý$ ;È2Ê <ÛXéVWS&ÞSï
)*ôÉò +$$&,ÿý-ÿ!&.ü/"ü'&0&1$"ü' )ÉØÉÊ=ÇÊ>Ò×*×ÈÊ>& e&+$ "þü%"þ&8/@A9
Å×?òÇÈ&Ò×ÖÓ e&4ý"ý! B&C!$%.ÿ&8/AD9
2ÖØòÉØ0 PRTÝèWTÚÛÚ e&.ü +-&C!$%.ÿ&8/Aö9
e&C$ ý56&8/A9
1Ç23*ÖÓÉØ0 "ÿÿ$÷%÷4ü56&ÿþ7$ýÿ#&÷& e&ûý! 6&C!$%.ÿ&8/A99
ù÷öø!ú&8&9ú&*$"%ü%+&%$$ÿ&"ý ÿ!% e&C! ý##&8/A/9
ÆÉ,Ç +'-"#ý#$ÿ&47!ü%+&4ü.ÿ&ö÷/0&ü%5$"'ÿ#&"ýÿ%ÿ'& e&OéíU Rï&ñRVRSí&RêUðRTWV
ÙSÛÛT&QðWV e&&E7ü$%ý$&46F&7!üþÿ!&÷&7$7'ÿ!&5$ý&$%$B
1ÖÈÈÖØÓó 2ç&ëÛWSí e&4êU ðRTWV&êVWUÛÚ&GðTðíHÛí
Æ3ÇÕÉÖ*& I"#$þü.ÿ'&ü%#ý$$ýü$%&ÿþ7$ýÿ#&$!&7!$'"5#&þýB&#ÿ&ýJýü$ý#$ÿ&$&#$$Jÿ&"%"#"ý$&ý77$ü5ýü$%#K&
1Ç23*ÖÓÇÊ I$%ý5&.IL&"!$'"5&4"77$!&5$!&ý##ü#ý%5ÿK
filmhnmo jnmngz kipec kdnmvec ~bcfYjlmkhnim
Q^M_OT`Y\YPR]UY
ghi ddedYb [PV\
jlg {iaemmodex
zidvbcvYwglydex
abc OT`YZ[NN\
egg
~~ nim~~
yde lgz
bpy evYbkh h
hev bh
aYjb cf
bkk{gnev v
klg}zevb |
v n
Y_ ZM
b M
n
g z
e
Yeoc
Q^MUYZM[NN
m i
adbvecYki
vedb ggnynd
evbydeYdnm
gkl }zklg
vilz}gzk
mim{zbmv
ke
ghb dbcYwv
TUQPQRS
ON
e
Y
z
n
l
X
mim
ai
MNO
ceo
VRW
qrst qrst qustqqstqqst

·¸·¹º·»º¼& & &xyz{|}&~~y~y|&&y|{{&~&&y{&z|&z}|&z&&zz}
½¾¿&·¸·¹º·»º¼& & && ¡&¢&£¢&¤¢ ¥ &¢¢¦
& &§ ¨© &ª¥«&¬©©©¦
&&®¯&°¢¥&©¥¥¢¤&¤¢ ¥ &±²±²&©¯ ¥&³¢&´µ¶¦&&&
N3O4P&
5&Q
7R
8R
8S
9&O
4R
8T
*U
+S
9R
8V
,&O
4W
-U
+W
-V
,R
8X
.
/Y0Z1[2\3]4^&5_6`6`7a8b6`9c7a6`:d9c9c&&&&;e&&&<f=g>h4^&5_:d:d7a?i@j5_7a9c@j8b:d&&&&;e&&&AkAAB
kkl=gCmCm3]DnEo1[2\BlFp1[GH
qrIsJt&&&;e&&&:d:dKu@j?i8b&&&Lv3]MwBl&:cc6rHc9b6&&&&
012
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
üª&·l¬ 1Z1Z[\&
ÿ
!"#&$$ ]^_`â
(+%,!&&$#$ !()(%!&$&ÿ$ NOPQRSQT&UVRWSXY
)#%*!&$&ÿ$
þ !ÿ%!&!'
()*&$$ ý (!#!!%&!$&ÿ$ bcd&WQU&efgh&
&NOPQRSQT
)%!&ÿ
!((&$$
ÿ"ÿ"-.%!+./
i]&·l¬
"#
$%'&00
'126$&03"0# 52$3'# $5152$&03"0#

78&00
! 5$"126$&30$40# 4$1#'&00 5$'$$2&$03"0#
$"1%2$&30'0#
"%"%9*2$7*+
ij^k_klm^ nonopqrstuvw&xy&zr{|t}&~{no&&&&&s}&~{zt&&&
^k&_k^ y&&&xy&&&qwu&wvwqu&nonopqrn{
i]& ¡& xy&¢u&qq¢&nonopqr£o&&x&y¤&¥¦&¤&§&xy&yy&¥&£r{|{s}&~¨©&
ª^jk«^&m¬`l ®&¥̄ °y&y¥&non{&±x¥&¤x&pq&±x¥
®&&v±y&yx¥¦&&²x&°¥x¥¦&&³&{{z´&¤x&{©o´&°&z´&¤x&{{o´&°&©z´&¤x&{oo´&
°&¨z´&¤x&o´&°&v±&x&µy&°&&°°²x±&{&x¥
¡k¶`·&¸¹^ll̀º &y&¥&&°&&
uvw&&¥&&°&&°x¥y&»& °¥x¥¦|r°¥&°x¥&»
{{o¼»& w&½&sr£|©}&~{st& ©z¼»& w&½&¨r{z|{s}&~tot&
& ¾&½&¨r£|n}&~{¨& & ¾&½&r{|©}&~t£t&
&{©o¼»&w&½&tr¨|©}&~¨£& o¼»& w&½&¨r£|{s}&~{©£&
& ¾&½&nr{|n}&~{o©& & ¾&½&©r{|t}&~t{s&
r°¥&°x¥y&°&&²x&°¥x¥¦& {oo¼»& w&½&sr{|{s}&~{zn&
¤x&uvw& & ¾&½&¨r{|n}&~{©n&
&{{o¼»&w&½&zr{|{s}&~{t&
& ¾&½&sr£|©}&~{st&
¿ÀÁÂÃÄ
Å&ÆÇÆÇÈÉ&ÊÂËÌÂÃ&ÍÎÀÃÂËÃ&ÀËÏÂËÂÏ&ÐÌÁÑ&ÒÓÔ&ÀË&ÕÖÊ×&ØËÙÃ&ÌÚÍÎÛÏÂ&ÆÇÆÇÈÉÜÝÇÞ&ßàßá×&×âãÒ&ÊÉÔÕÒä&ÁÀ&ÃÛååÀËÁ&ÁÑÂ&ÃÑÀÂ
æ&çèéêëì&íîïð&ïñòè&èòêëñï&óéô&óèèéòõêöóñô÷ø&ùú&öòéô&ñðóë&ñôöè÷óñôû&ïñòè&èòêëñ
Å&×ÀÎÏ&ÀåÂÚ&ØÁ&ÁÂÙåÎØÁÂÏ&ÃÁÀå&åÀÌÚÁÃ
345&7889&48*+98,&4-+-,8.
/01234&566786976:99&&&;&&<=>4&5::7?@579@8:&&&;&&AAAB=CC3DE12BF1GHIJ&&;&&::K@?8&&L3MB&:6H96&&&
012
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1~1~&
ìwváwä
êpp]tt[ëo]t
½ßàáâãwvä ½èxwvä
1~1~~|& 1~1|~|& ¡¢ 1~1~2 1~1~2¼½

&&& &&&& ©ª&« ¾&«
e&PRT WT e&&
£¤&¥RS&VW¦&W§UR̈T& e&&¬®¯°&±²±²³´µ¶±&°·µ¸& e&¿WT
e&&
& §VR¤T̈X ®¸¹&®º̄· e&&
ÀÁº¹&Â¸¹&·¯&Âºº°Ã°&&
e&PRT WT e&PRT WT ®°¸Ä&·¸Å¹&®¸&Âºº°Ã°
e&&
& e&»U WTWS e&ÆÇUR̈TWV
åâäæçààçæáèâ&Ýééwääèváwä
1~1~|È 1~1~|ÈÒ 1~1~|ÈØÙ 1~1~|ÈÝ

© © © ©
e&&ÀÁº¹&Â¸¹&ÃºÉ&°º&Ä¸& e&&Ó¸®°&¸·&ÔÄÕ&Ä¸& e&&Ú¹°&¸·&ÔÄÕ&Ä¸&®¯¸°¹& e&&ÀÁº¹&Â¸¹&·¹¯¯¯&¹Ä&
ÅÃ¹&¸·&¹º̄&º°&¯°°&Ã&ÊµÊË±Ì& ®¯¸°¹&Â¯°Ã&ÅºÃ&¸·&¸Â&Ã& ¹º®¯¯&¸&Ã&Â¹Ä&ÅÃ¹& Ä¸ºÉ&ÅÃ¹&¸·&¹º̄&º°&
ÍÎ¶&ÄÄÏ ¥SWÖ&¥W§&T̈&¥V×¤&§V̈T̈X& Â®&º°&¯°°&Ã&ÊµÑËÐÌ&ÍÛÎ&ÄÄÏÜ& ¯°°&Ã&¶µÑËÐÌ&ÍÑ±²&ÄÄÏÞ&
e&&ÀÁº¹°&ÄººÄÄ&ÐÌ& §RTÜR̈T ´¯&¹Áº¹°&ÑµÊË±Ì&Í±±&ÄÄÏ& ÖW¤×S&¥SRÖ&U&¤URÇ
Í¶Ñ&ÄÄÏ&ÄººÄÄ&¸·&¹º̄ e&&ÀÁº¹°&ÑµÊË±Ì&Í±±&ÄÄÏ& ÖT̈Ö̈×Ö&W&¥SWÖ e&&ÀÁº¹°&ÐÌ&Í¶Ñ&ÄÄÏ&ÄººÄÄ&
ÖT̈Ö̈×Ö&W&¥SWÖ URÇ&SWV̈
1~1~}2Ý
©&íî
e&&
ÀÁº¹&Â¸¹&·¹¯¯¯&¹Ä&
ÖR×TUT̈X
012 3O
N4P&
5&Q
7R
8R
8S
9&O
4R
8T
*U
+S
9R
8V
,&O
4W
-U
+W
-V
,R
8X
.
Y/Z0[1\2]3^4&_5`6`6a7b8`6c9a7`6d:c9c9&&&&e;&&&f<g=h>^4&_5d:d:a7i?j@_5a7c9j@b8d:&&&&e;&&&kAkkl GHsItJ&&&e;&&&d:d:uKj@i?b8&&&vLw3MxBy&:z6{H|9}&
AABg=mCmC]3nDoE[1\2lBpF[1qr 6&&&
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
¬ÒÓÔ 1N1NOP&
ÂÜÒÝÜÔ
1N1NOPQ2NRR 1N1NOPQ2NRR& 1N1NOPQ2NRR ÕÖÖ×ØØÙÚÛ×Ø

STUVWXY&ZY[ U&ZY[ YX&U&ZY[
\&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc
\&&
efghij&kgll&jmno&fp&ifk&qrst& \&&
h|lgnoj&&&}&~& &\&&h|lgnoj&}&&&}&
umiv&jvrllfu&poworl&xyzy{&|lfjop& yzyzx&fp&ifk&qrst&sfghi ~&yzyzx&fp&ifk&
mh|lgnoj&x}&~&yzyzxx}& \& ^_b qrst&sfghi&umiv&nook&poworl&
pogmpon&fp&krprllol&rps&sfghimh \& ^_b
1N1NOPQ2N1¡ 1N1NOPQ2N1¡ 1N1NOPQ2NRR«¬ 1N1NOPQ2N1¡«¬

¢W£¤¥¦T&ZY[ U&¢W£¤¥¦T&ZY[ YX&±V²&ZY[ ¢W£¤¥¦T&YX&±V²&ZY[
\&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc \&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
¹b_cdc
\&&
efghij&kgll&jmno&fp&ifk&qrst& \&&
h|lgnoj&&}&}&ÍÎ& \&&
ºdb©§d»&¼^§ªdc½&»^ c&»dd &¨b_& \&&
xrprllol&rps&origpoj&fpon&
umiv&jvrllfu&poworl&vflnfkoh& yzyzxÏzyÐ&fp&ifk&qrst& b_c&¼^§db§¨&¼^§&^d_b ¾& »^ c&»dd &¨b_&b_c&¼^§db§¨&¼^§&
rnqgjirtlo&jvfo ¨^©_ rtgjmwo&mhjirllrimfhj kfiohimrllÑ&rtgjmwo&mhjirllrimfhj
\&&
yzyzx&|lfjop&mh|lgnoj& \& ^_b \& ^_b \&&
¹^ c`^d_&¼©_À^_&»&bcÁ©»dc&b&
yzyzxx}&jvfo&pogmpon&fp& ad&»a^d
b§b d &b§¨&¨^©__ª \& ^_b
\& ^_b
1N1NOPQ2NRR«¬®¯° 1N1NOPQ2N1¡«¬®¯° 1N1NOPQ2NRËRÃÄÂ 1N1NOPQ2N1¡ÃÄÂ

YX&±V²&ZY[&³´µ&¶·¸ ¢W£¤¥¦T&YX&±V²&ZY[&³´µ&¶·¸ ÆVÉµ¤Ê¤Å¦&ZY[ ¢ÆÇÅ¢&ZY[
\&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
¹b_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc&
\&&
ºdb©§d»&¼^§ªdc½&»^ c&»dd &¨b_& \&&
ºdb©§d»&¼^§ªdc½&»^ c&»dd &¨b_& \&&
ºdb©§d»&»^ c&¼^§ªdc&»dd &¨b_&b§¨&\&&flnfkoh&gh|imfh&umiv&
b_c&¼^§db§¨&¼^§&^d_b ¾& b_c&¼^§db§¨&¼^§&^d_b ¾& rhn&fporps&umiv&jifk&mh&jfmi&jvfo¿ d¨ bdc&»^Ìa^ c`^d_&^_»
rtgjmwo&mhjirllrimfhj rtgjmwo&mhjirllrimfhj \&^_b \&&¹b_c d&À^_§^ »&a^ c`^d_&
\&&
&jvfo&kpfwmnoj&rnnmimfhrl& \&&
&jvfo&kpfwmnoj&rnnmimfhrl& ¼©_À^_
tlrno&jifk&|lorprh|o tlrno&jifk&|lorprh|o¿&flnfkoh& \& ^_b
\& ^_b ¼©_À^_&»&bcÁ©»dc&b&ad&»a^d
\& ^_b
1N1NOPQ2NRRÂÃÄÂ 1N1NOPQ2N1¡ÂÃÄÂ
Å¦YÚ&ÆÇÅ¢&ZY[ Å¦YÚ&¢ÆÇÅ¢&ZY[
\&&
]^_àb_cdc& \&&
]^_àb_cdc&
Èfp&rtgjmwo&rkklm|rimfhj&origpoj& \&&Èfp&rtgjmwo&rkklm|rimfhj&origpoj&
\&&
»^ c&¼^§ªdc&»dd &¨b_&b§¨&b_c& »^ c&¼^§ªdc&»dd &¨b_&b§¨&b_c&
fporps&umiv&jkpmh&lfrnon&jifk&mh& fporps&umiv&jkpmh&lfrnon&jifk&mh&
ad&»^¼¼&»a^d ad&»^¼¼&»a^d
\& ^_b \&&¹b_c d&À^_§^ »&a^ c`^d_&¼©_À^_
\& ^_b
345&7889&48*+98,&4-+-,8.
/01234&566786976:99&&&;&&<=>4&5::7?@579@8:&&&;&&AAAB=CC3DE12BF1GHIJ&&;&&::K@?8&&L3MB&:6H96&&&
012
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1M1MNO%
Ç½¾º½¶
ÀÁÁÂÃÃÄÅÆÂÃ
µ́¶·¸¹¹̧·º»µ%¼¼½¶¶»¾º½¶%¼»µ·¿
1M1MNOPQM 1M1MNOP 1M1MNOP1 1M1MNOP¬

RSTU%TVWX%TYZZW[\ X%T\WZ%TZX[ %¡Y¢V%X% Z\X[ Y®[¯%TVWX
]%%
^_àbcde%fghi`_fjd%k`_%kbkli% ]%%dnb_dc%l`%ùmd_%f_fuudu%f_s% ]%%^_àbcde%i`_b£`glfu%s`nglbgj% ]%%
dnb_de%f%l`%_fbu%̀k%}{%
eh_dm%nedc%mbli%opqr%f_set% ei`d%l`%hudf_%xy{%|xv%ss% ¤¥¦§¨©%§¦%¦©%¦ª%¤«©%% |x}~%ss
mid_d%_dadfu%be%udee%lifg% ufcd%el` ebgjud%_fdlldc%̀_%kunei%k_fsd ]%%
qi`d%_dufhde%wz^°%k`_%
vwxyxz{%|}~%ss ]% ]% ¦©%¦ª%ª¥±%§%
]% _djnuf_%f_s%mbli%̀ad_idfc%
«²©¦³¤
]%%

1M1MNOP1
TZ%RWX[%RZ
]%%
pedc%l`%edhn_d%^w}%
ûfelbh%oàd_%l`%hubgcd_%`c
011 234%6778%379*87+%3,*,+7-
./0123%455675865988%%%:%%;<=3%4996>?468?79%%%:%%@@@A<BB2CD01AE0FGHI%%:%%99J?>7%%K2LA%95G85%%
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts Tag # 12, 12A and 12C - Deadbolt - Maxum Commercial (11 series)
123
Maxum Deadbolts
FEATURES Medeco3 BiLevel Medeco X4 CLIQ
UL Listed for use on fire doors having a rating up to three hours • • • •

ANSI/BHMA 156.36 Grade 1 Certification for auxiliary locks and
associated products •
ANSI/BHMA A156.30 Level A Certification on the cylinder assures
patent protected key control and physical strength •
Can be incorporated into existing master key systems • • •
Security features to protect against drill, wrench, ice pick, kick-in,
hammer, bumping and prying attacks • •
Solid brass construction provides high quality and long cylinder life • • •
Deadbolt is designed to accommodate both mortise and drive-in face
applications for greater flexibility and ease of installation. • • •
Large thumbturn provides ease of use for physically challenged individuals • • •
Keys may be integrated with Hybrid proximity head for greater system retrofit. • • •
Double cylinder captive thumbturn safety option available • •
Medeco3 Premium High Security Medeco3 BiLevel Patented Key Control
For effective mechanical protection against most forms of Medeco3 BiLevel cylinders may be incorporated into a master key
attack as well as protection against unauthorized duplicate system with Medeco3 high security, offering protection against all
keys, Medeco3 cylinders are recommended. Security features types of attack where needed, and patented key control cylinders
including hardened steel components, pins that must be for areas requiring less protection. BiLevel cylinders offer patented
elevated, rotated, and interact with both a sidebar and a slider, and control against unauthorized duplication of keys without the
additional pick resistant features make Medeco3 the additional security features protecting against force or
cylinder of choice to protect people, property and information. surreptitious attack.
Medeco X4 Patented Key Control Loss & Liability Control

Medeco X4 cylinders offer patented control against unauthorized Many of the cylinders in this section are also available with an
duplication of keys without the additional security eCylinder Loss & Liability Control Solution. See the eCylinder
features protecting against force or surreptitious attack. Section for more details.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
124 Deadbolts
Medeco Maxum Deadbolts

®
Deadbolts are about strength. Just hold a Medeco® ANSI

Grade 1 Maxum® deadbolt in your hand, and you know this
is one tough hunk of protection. As tough as a Maxum®
deadbolt is on the outside, it’s that smart on the inside.
It can be ordered with the triple-locking security of a
Medeco3cylinder. Recommended for residential and business
use, it’s available as a single- or double-cylinder or with a
unique “captive thumbturn.” The captive thumbturn converts the inside cylinder to a thumbturn
for safe exit when the facility is occupied. A quick conversion when the facility is not occupied
returns it to double cylinder mode and guards against unauthorized entry or exit. Maxum®
deadbolts offer maximum protection with solid-brass construction, along with anti-drilling
and anti-prying features.
Patented Key Control • ANSI/BHMA A156.36 Grade 1 and UL437 Listed
Protects against unauthorized duplication of cylinders for high security
your keys. • Fits doors 1 3/8’’ to 2 1/2’’ thick
• Standard 2 1/8’’ crossbore and 1’’ edge bore
Certified Grade 1
1
(ANSI A115.13 prep)
BHMA certified Grade 1, passes to the highest
standards in the industry. Warranty:
Lifetime warranty against defects in material and
Drill Protection
workmanship.
Offers maximum protection with solid-brass
construction and strategically placed drill pins. Finishes:
Available in all standard finishes to match existing
Protection From Physical Attack hardware.
Medeco3 Medeco Maxum Deadbolts are UL 437 listed
and stand up to prying, picking and other forms of Applications:
physical attack. I t is the ideal choice for a wide variety of commercial and
heavy duty residential applications where consistent
Special Angle Cut Keys
quality, ease of use and installation are required. Ideal
Requires a special key cutting machine and access applications include:
to Medeco specific blanks, available in a variety of
restrictions to support every need. • Office buildings
• Hospitals
Picking and Bumping Protection • Schools
Medeco3 cylinders use a sidebar that prevent the key • Restaurants
from rotating until it is elevated, rotated and aligned
in the correct position. This feature protects against • Apartments
bumping and picking attacks. • Retail outlets
Technical Information: Available Key Technologies:

• SFIC cylinder options include Medeco X4 and Nexgen XT Mechanical: eCylinder:
• Unique “captive thumbturn” – Medeco3 – Medeco3 CLIQ
• Bolt is designed for easy conversion accommodating – Medeco3 BiLevel – Medeco CLIQ
either mortise and drive-in applications – Medeco X4
• Solid-brass construction with steel inserts for added
protection
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 125
How to Order:
1 2 3 4 5
11C601 T 05 LT S
base part # cylinder finish keyway pinning
S= P= M=
Refer to pages 125-138 – = Original Refer to the inside Insert keyway if Sub- Pinned Master
for descriptions and K = Medeco KM back cover of this known or contact Assembled (Combinated) Keyed
technical specifications T = Medeco3 catalog for finish Customer Service (Uncombinated) Keyed alike Provide specific
to find the corresponding W = Biaxial options. Include for help. (KA) pinning or
No additional
base part number. J = Medeco3 the corresponding contact
information Keyed different
BiLevel Customer
two digit finish needed (KD)
Service for
C = Medeco CLIQ number. 2 keys per support
N = Medeco X4 cylinder
Must specify
Upcharge for quantity
split finish. for keys.
BUILD A MAXUM DEADBOLT BASE PART#
11X X X X
Maxum Deadbolt Backset

1 = 2 3/8" Backset, 1 1/8" Front
Trim 2 = 2 3/4" Backset, 1 1/8" Front
C = Commercial 3 = 2 3/8" Backset, 1" Front
R = Residential 4 = 2 3/4" Backset, 1" Front
5 = 2 3/8" Backset, Round Front
Cylinder Type 6 = 2 3/4" Backset, Round Front
L = Less Bolt Assembly
2 = Blank Plate
3 = LFIC (6 Pin)
4 = LFIC (Less Core)
5 = Medeco (5 Pin)

6 = Medeco (6 Pin)
7 = SFIC (Less Core)
8 = SFIC (6 Pin)
9 = SFIC (7 Pin)
Function
0 = Cylinder x Thumbturn
1 = Cylinder x Thumbturn (Classroom)
2 = Cylinder x Cylinder
3 = Cylinder x Cylinder (Captive)
4 = Cylinder x Plate
5 = Dummy x Thumbturn
6 = Dummy x Cylinder
7 = Dummy x Plate
8 = Plate x Thumbturn
9 = Plate x Cylinder
D = Dummy x Dummy
P = Plate x Plate
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
126 Deadbolts
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt- Commercial Trim

Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Plate Outside with Inside

11C281
Thumbturn, 1 1/8" Faceplate†, 2 3/8" Backset
Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Plate Outside with Inside
11C282
Thumbturn, 1 1/8" Faceplate†, 2 3/4" Backset
11C601 (P)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 1 1/8" Faceplate,
2 3/8" Backset 11C601 (S)
•
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 11C602 (P)
2 3/4" Backset 11C602 (S)
•
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C603 (P)
1" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C603 (S)
•
•
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive In 11C605 (P)
Front, 2 3/8" Backset 11C605 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive In 11C606 (P)
Front, 2 3/4" Backset 11C606 (S)
•
11C60L (P)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Less Bolt
11C60L (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Classroom 11C611 (P)
Function, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C611 (S)
Classroom Function, Drive In, 2 3/8" Backset 11C615 (S)
Classroom Function, Drive In, 2 3/4" Backset 11C616 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C61L (P)
Classroom Function, Less Bolt 11C61L (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Classroom 11C612 (P)
Classroom Function, 1" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C613 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock with 11C641 (P)
Blank Plate Inside, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C641 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock with 11C642 (P)
Blank Plate Inside, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/4" Backset 11C642 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, with Blank Plate 11C691 (P)
Outside, 1 1/8" Faceplate* , 2 3/8" Backset 11C691 (S)
Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, with Blank Plate 11C692 (P)
Outside, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/4" Backset 11C692 (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 127
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® - Commercial Trim

11C30L (P)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Less Bolt
11C30L (S)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C301 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C301 (S)
Drive-In Front, 2 3/8" Backset 11C305 (S)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock Classroom 11C311 (P)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock 11C313 (P)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock 11C314 (P)
Function, Drive-In Front, 2 3/8" Backset 11C315 (S)
Function, Drive-In Front, 2 3/4" Backset 11C316 (S)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock 11C31L (P)
Classroom Function, Less Bolt 11C31L (S)
Blank Inside, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/8" Backset 11C341 (S)
Blank Inside, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 3/4" Backset 11C342 (S)
Blank Outside, 1 1/8" Faceplate *, 2 3/8" Backset 11C391 (S)
Blank Outside, 1 1/8" Faceplate *, 2 3/4" Backset 11C392 (S)
LFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock,
11C401
1 1/8" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C402
11C405
Drive-In Front, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C406
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
128 Deadbolts
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® - Commercial Trim

SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock,

11C701
1 1/8" Faceplate, Less Core , 2 3/8" Backset
11C702
11C703
1" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C704
11C705
11C706
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Classroom
11C711
Function, 1 1/8" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C712
Function, 1 1/8" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/4" Backset
11C713
Function, 1" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C714
Function, 1" Faceplate, Less Core, 2 3/4" Backset
11C715
Function, Drive-In Front, Less Core, 2 3/8" Backset
11C716
Function, Drive-In Front, Less Core, 2 3/4" Backset
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 1 1/8" 11C801 (P)
Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C801 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 1 1/8" 11C802 (P)
Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/4" Backset 11C802 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C803 (P)
1" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C803 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive-In 11C805 (P)
Front, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder , 2 3/8" Backset 11C805 (S)
Drive-In Front, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/4" Backset 11C806 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Classroom 11C811 (P)
Funct., 1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cyl. 2 3/8" Backset 11C811 (S)
Funct., 1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cyl. 2 3/4" Backset 11C812 (S)
Funct., 1" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cyl. 2 3/8" Backset 11C813 (S)
Funct., 1" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cyl. 2 3/4" Backset 11C814 (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 129
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® - Commercial Trim


Function, Drive-In Front, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C815 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Inside, 11C841 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C841 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Out- 11C891 (P)
side, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder *, 2 3/8" Backset 11C891 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Out- 11C892 (P)
side, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin SFIC Cylinder *, 2 3/4" Backset 11C892 (S)
Function, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C911 (S)
Function, 1 1/8" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/4" Backset 11C912 (S)
Function, 1" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C913 (S)
Function, 1" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder, 2 3/4" Backset 11C914 (S)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder,2 3/4" Backset 11C942 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Outside, 11C991 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder *, 2 3/8" Backset 11C991 (S)
SFIC Single Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Blank Outside, 11C992 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 7 Pin SFIC Cylinder *, 2 3/4" Backset 11C992 (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
130 Deadbolts
Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt - Commercial Trim

Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C621 (P)

Drive- In Front, 2 3/8" Backset 11C625 (S)
11C62L (P)
Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Less Bolt
11C62L (S)
Double Cylinder Captive Thumbturn Maxum®- Commercial Trim

Captive Double Cylinder Maxum Deadbolt®

11C63L (P)
Lock, Less Bolt, 1 3/4" - 2" door 11C63L (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C631 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 1 3/4" - 2" door , 2 3/8" Backset 11C631 (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C631T (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/8" Backset 11C631T (S)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 1 3/4" - 2" door, 2 3/4" Backset 11C632 (S)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/4" Backset 11C632T (S)
1" Faceplate, 1 3/4" - 2" door, 2 3/8" Backset 11C633 (S)
1" Faceplate, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/8" Backset 11C633T (S)
1" Faceplate, 1 3/4" - 2" door 11C634 (S)
1" Faceplate, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/4" Backset 11C634T (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive-In 11C635 (P)
Front, 1 3/4" - 2" door, 2 3/8" Backset 11C635 (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive-In 11C635T (P)
Front, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/8" Backset 11C635T (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive-In 11C636 (P)
Front, 1 3/4" - 2" door, 2 3/4" Backset 11C636 (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, Drive-In 11C636T (P)
Front, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door, 2 3/4" Backset 11C636T (S)
Captive Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C63LT (P)
Less Bolt, 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" door 11C63LT (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 131
LFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® - Commercial Trim

LFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C323 (P)

LFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C32L (P)
Less Bolt 11C32L (S)
LFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock,
11C421
11C422
11C425
11C426
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
132 Deadbolts
SFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® - Commercial Trim

SFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock,

11C721
11C722
11C723
11C724
11C725
11C726
SFIC Double Cylinder Maxum® Deadbolt Lock, 11C821 (P)
1 1/8" Faceplate, 6 Pin Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C821 (S)
1" Faceplate, 6 Pin Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C823 (S)
1" Faceplate, 6 Pin Cylinder 11C824 (S)
Drive-In Front, 6 Pin Cylinder, 2 3/8" Backset 11C825 (S)
Interchangeable Core Cylinders for Maxum® Deadbolts

320201 (P)
6 pin LFIC Cylinder
320201 (S)
33600006 (P)
6 Pin SFIC Cylinder Medeco KM
33600006 (S)
33700006 (P)
7 Pin SFIC Cylinder Medeco KM
33700006 (S)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 133
Maxum Deadbolt Cylinder Assemblies

6 Pin Outside Cylinder Assembly for Maxum® 110A04 (P)

Deadbolt Lock 110A04 (S)
6 Pin Inside Cylinder Assembly for Maxum® 110A05 (P)
LFIC Outside Cylinder Assembly for Maxum® 110A08 (P)
LFIC Inside Cylinder Assembly for Maxum® 110A09 (P)
6 Pin Outside Captive Cylinder 110A06
6 Pin Inside Captive Cylinder 110A07
Cylinder Housing & Plugs for Maxum® Deadbolt

LFIC Outside Cylinder Housing for Maxum ®

110A08L
Deadbolt Lock
LFIC Inside Cylinder Housing for Maxum®
110A09L
Deadbolt Lock
6 Pin Plug for Maxum Deadbolt (except Inside
1202800
Captive Thumbturn)
6 Pin Plug for Maxum Deadbolt Inside Captive
1202900
Thumbturn
Bolt Assemblies for Maxum® Deadbolt

2 3/8" Maxum® Bolt 1" X 2 1/4" Faceplate 110A1911
2 3/8" Maxum® Bolt 1 1/8" X 2 1/4" Faceplate 110A1912
2 3/8" Maxum® Drive-in Bolt (Available in 26 finish only) 110A1913
2 3/4" Maxum® Bolt 1" X 2 1/4" Faceplate 110A1921
2 3/4" Maxum® Bolt 1 1/8" X 2 1/4" Faceplate 110A1922
2 3/4" Maxum® Drive-in Bolt (Available in 26 finish only) 110A1923
5 Pack Round Front Assembly For Maxum® Drive-In Bolt

94-0058-MED
(Includes: CP-180961-26 and CP-011016-020)
Round Front Assembly For Maxum® Drive-In Bolt
94-0059
(Includes: CP-180961-26 and CP-011016-020)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
134 Deadbolts
Maxum Deadbolt Components

6 Pin Length Deadbolt Lock Outside Dummy Cylinder 110A16
Residential Blank Inside Plate Assembly for
Maxum® Deadbolt Lock 110A17
5 Pin Length Deadbolt Lock Outside Dummy Cylinder 110A18
Commercial Blank Inside Plate Assembly for
Maxum® Deadbolt Lock 110A14
Residential StyleThumbturn To Fit On Captive
Thumbturn Key (Original/Biaxial) 110A20
Residential Style Thumbturn To Fit On Captive
Thumbturn Key (Medeco3) 110A21
Commercial Thumbturn and Base Plate Assembly 110A12
Commercial Style Thumbturn To Fit On Captive
Thumbturn Key (Medeco3) 110018
Commercial Thumbturn & set screw 110A22
Residential Thumbturn & set screw 110A23
Residential Thumbturn and Base Plate Assembly 110A10
Commercial Style Thumbturn To Fit On Captive
Thumbturn Key (Original/Biaxial) 110092
Thumbturn Trim Plate Package for Maxum®
Deadbolt Lock 940210
Inside Cylinder Trim Plate Package for
Commercial Maxum® I/C Deadbolt Lock
(includes CP-021090 & CP-180141) 94-0030
Spacer Rings for 1 3/8" Door for Maxum®
Deadbolt Lock (Package of 2) 940212
Inside Cylinder Trim Plate Package for Maxum®
Double Cylinder Deadbolt Lock (Includes
CP-021090 & CP-180131) 94-0029
#8 x 2" FHWS Strike Box mounting screws CP-010234-320
#8 x 3/4" comb. Wood/Machine S Bolt & Strike
mounting screws CP-010235-120-XX
Screw Package for 5 and 6 Pin Single Cylinder
Maxum® Deadbolt Lock CP-011762
Screw Package for 5 Pin Double Cylinder
Screw Package for 6 Pin Double Cylinder
Screw Package for Blank x Thumbturn Maxum®
Deadbolt Lock CP-011751
Screw Package for Blank x Cylinder Maxum®
Screw Package for Blank x Thumbturn Maxum®
Deadbolt Lock for 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" thick door CP-011753
Screw Package for Blank x Cylinder Maxum®
Deadbolt Lock for 2 1/4" - 2 1/2" thick door CP-011754
Screw Package for 6 Pin Classroom Function
Collar for Maxum® Residential Style Deadbolt
Lock 5 Pin CP-070691
Lock 6 Pin CP-070701
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Deadbolts 135
Maxum® Deadbolt Components

Collar for Maxum Commercial Style Deadbolt
®
Lock (Inside & Outside) CP-070711

Lock Thick Door Captive Thumbturn 5 Pin CP-070721
Lock Thick Door Captive Thumbturn 6 Pin CP-070731
Collar for Maxum® Commercial Style Deadbolt
Lock Thick Door Captive Thumbturn CP-070741
Strike for Maxum® Deadbolt Lock CP-180061
Ball bearings (Allen head of mounting screws)
.191" diameter silver CP-250010
Ball bearings (tip of mounting screws) .202"
diameter black CP-250020
Strike Reinforcement Strike Box for Maxum®
Keyblank for Captive Thumbturn Key for
Maxum® Deadbolt 6 Pin Varies by Key Section
(factory will supply correct part number) KYB XX6605
Maxum® Deadbolt Tailpieces

Thumbturn Tailpiece for Maxum® Deadbolt
lock for 1 3/4" - 2 1/2" thick door CT-F42
Thumbturn Tailpiece for Classroom Function
Maxum® Deadbolt lock, 1 3/4" - 2" thick doors CT-F43
Thumbturn Tailpiece for Classroom Function
Maxum® Deadbolt lock for doors 2 1/4" - 2 1/2"
thick CT-F44
Tailpiece for Maxum® Deadbolt lock, outside
cylinder, .532" length, for doors up to 1 3/4"
thick CT-Y60
Tailpiece for Maxum® Deadbolt outside
cylinder, 1.430" length for doors over 1 3/4" thick CT-Y61
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 13 - Certified FE Hinge -

USBP I-8514 (I-8513) Full Mortise
“Protecting People and Property”
USBP I-8514 Full Mortise

(I-8513)
Rated for thrust loads or doors weighing up to 2000 pounds. Built with anti-friction needle roller bearings to
transfer the higher radial and thrust loads. Hardened precision ground alloy steel pin with Armoloy® coating
for additional corrosion protection
SPECIFICATIONS
Hinge Size 5”
Material 304 Stainless Steel US32D Finish
Thrust Capacity (Door Weight) 2000 lbs.
Radial Capacity 800 lbs.
Operating Torque * 5 lbs. in.
Bolt Description ¼-20 316 SS flat head socket
Non-Removable pin design
Hinge Weight (approx.) 7 lbs.
United States Bullet Proofing, Inc. (800) 363-8328 Toll Free
16201 Branch Court (301) 218-7920 Local
Upper Marlboro, MD 20774 (301) 218-7925 Fax
www.usbulletproofing.com info@usbulletproofing.com
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 14A - Lockset - Corbin Russwin - ML2067xNSMx32D
ML2000 Series
Mortise Locksets
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
ML2000 Series
Table of Contents Quality Aesthetics

The ML2000 Series is a Grade 1 mortise Complement any application with the full
lock designed to meet the rigors of range of trim designs and finishes offered
ML2000 Series Overview .........2 high-traffic commercial, institutional, with ML2000 Series. From stainless steel
ML2000 Series Features .......3-4 industrial and government applications. security trims to bright brass Vineyard™
Constructed of heavy-gauge steel, the levers, design continuum can be achieved
ML2000 Series Functions .....5-9 lockbody features our patented Quick without forfeiting aesthetics. For
Multi-Function Reversible latchbolt, and a 1" stainless additional information regarding designer
Configuration ..................10-11 steel deadbolt. A wide variety of trim trim, see the Corbin Russwin Vineyard™
designs and functions and a 10-year Collection and Muséo® Collection
ML20900 ECL Applications ...12 warranty lend to the ML2000’s versatility catalogs.
ML20900 ECL Features .........14 and reliability, making it the ideal choice
for use in offices, schools, hospitals, hotels
ML20900 ECL Functions ..15-16 Key Advantages
and other high-use applications.
• Patented Quick Reversible feature
ML20600 NAC Series enables reversal of hands without
Electrified Mortise Lock with Security disassembling the lock case (Patent
High Security Monitoring ......17 Further discourage intrusion and abuse pending and/or patent
NAC Functions .................18-19 with the ML2000VR (Vandal Resistant) www.assaabloydss.com/patents)
series mortise lock. This lock features • Security trims provide a vandal-
Trim Designs ....................20-39 vandal-resistant stainless steel escutcheons resistant barrier
Muséo® Trim .........................40 with tapered edges and Torx® pin tamper • Can be used with new or existing
resistant screws. When matched with Corbin Russwin key systems. Also
Muséo® Inspire™ accepts cylinders of most other
Corbin Russwin patented high-security
Roseless Trim ........................41 cylinders, any door can become a manufacturers.
Muséo® Levers .................42-54 formidable barrier to intruders. • Provides life safety and security in a
single door prep, saving the additional
Vineyard™ Collection cost of a deadlock
Trim .................................55-57 Flexible
The ML2000 Series has a multi-function • Thru-bolted trim designs for proper
Vandal Resistant Trim (VR) ......58 capability, allowing 12 functions to be alignment and increased security
configured from one lockbody. The • Multi-function lockbody
Behavioral Health
Trim (BHSS)............................59 ML2054 entrance function (ANSI F04) uses
a universal lockbody with the ability to
Behavioral Health Lever reconfigure into other functions without
Trim (BLSS)............................60 dissembling the lock case.
Push/Pull Trim (HPSK) ............. 61

Anti-Harm Trim (HSS) ............. 62
Options and Accessories....63-71
How to Order ..................72-74
Quick Codes ....................75-77
How to Specify ................78-80
Reversing Handing ................81
www.corbinrusswin.com
ML2000.2
Copyright © 2001-2018, ASSA ABLOY Access and Egress Hardware Group, Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without the express
written permission of ASSA ABLOY Access and Egress Hardware Group, Inc. is prohibited. Patent pending and/or patent www.assaabloydss.com/patents. 45300 10/18
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Features
ML2000 Series
Features Hub Certification/Compliance

Handing • Knob: stainless steel, 9/32" (7mm) x ANSI/BHMA
Handed; quick reversible. The lockset can 9/32" (7mm). Certified A156.13 Series 1000,
be re-handed without disassembling the • Lever: steel, 5/16" (8mm). (Including VR ) Operational and Security Grade 1.
lock case; see page 81. Spacing Meets A117.1 Accessibility Code.
Door Thickness C. to c. knob/lever to cylinder: 3-5/8" Federal
1-3/4" (44mm) standard. (92mm). Meets FF-H-106C.
Optional door thicknesses available; see C. to c. knob/lever to thumbturn: 2-7/16"
(62mm). UL/cUL-UL10C Positive Pressure
Quick Codes, page 76. All locks listed for A label and lesser class
Backset Strike doors, 4' (122cm) x 10' (305cm) single or
2-3/4" (70mm). Wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel, 8' (244cm) x 10' (305cm) pair (3 hour fire
ANSI straight lip standard, 4-7/8" (124mm) door). Letter F and UL symbol on armored
Lockcase x 1-1/4" (32mm) x 1-1/8" (29mm) lip to
Heavy-gauge steel, 5-7/8" (149mm) x 4" front indicate listing.
center. Optional strikes, lip lengths and
(102mm) x 15/16" (24mm). ANSI wrought strike box available; see Any retrofit or other field modification to
Optional: non-ferrous lockcase for Quick Codes, page 76. a fire rated opening can potentially impact
corrosion resistance; see Quick Codes, Cylinder the fire rating of the opening, and Corbin
page 76. Brass, 6-pin, L4 keyway, 0-bitted standard. Russwin, Inc. makes no representations or
Front Optional cylinders available; see Quick warranties concerning what such impact
Heavy-gauge steel, 8" (203mm) x 1-1/4" Codes, page 75. may be in any specific situation. When
(32mm) x -3/32" (2mm). Accommodates retrofitting any portion of an existing fire-
Keys rated opening, or specifying and installing
flat doors and doors beveled 1/8" (3mm)
Two nickel silver standard. a new fire-rated opening, please consult
in 2" (51mm). Furnished 1-1/16" (27mm),
optional D138, wide for 1-3/8" (35mm) Keying Features Available with a code specialist or local code official
doors. Master keying (Authority Having Jurisdiction) to ensure
Construction master keying compliance with all applicable codes and
Armored Front ratings.
Visual key control
Wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel
Concealed key control California State Reference Code
attached by machine screws to lockcase
Plug only to show (concealed shell) (Formerly Title 19, California State Fire Marshal
front. ML2000VR utilizes security Torx®
7-pin cylinder Standard)
screws.
Security cylinder All levers with returns, return to within
Latchbolt
Access 3® cylinder 1/2" (13mm) of door face.
2-piece mechanical with anti-friction
Pyramid cylinder Windstorm/Hurricane
insert, 5/8" (16mm) x 1" (25mm) x 3/4"
Interchangeable core (IC) Certified (refer to local codes).
(19mm) throw.
Security IC
Auxiliary Latchbolt Pyramid IC
9/16" (14mm) effective throw and Access 3® IC
3/8" (10mm) effective auxiliary latch Master ring cylinder
deadlocking. Blockout cylinder
Deadbolt Flex head cylinder
One-piece stainless steel, 19/32" (15mm) Warranty
x 1-1/4" (32mm) x 1" (25mm) throw. Ten-year limited.
Occupancy Indicator
Occupancy indicators for use with ML2000
x sectional trim. Design features option
for dual indicators on double cylinder
functions, confirming door is secured from
either side. Emergency override standard
for all non-keyed functions.
VR Indicates ML2000VR (Vandal Resistant) availability.
ML2000.3
45300 10/18 written permission of ASSA ABLOY Access and Egress Hardware Group, Inc. is prohibited. Patent pending and/or patent www.assaabloydss.com/patents.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Features
ML2000 Series
Finishes
ANSI/BHMA 605 (US3) Bright Brass
ANSI/BHMA 606 (US4) Satin Brass
ANSI/BHMA 611 (US9) Bright Bronze
ANSI/BHMA 612 (US10) Satin Bronze
ANSI/BHMA 613 (US10B) Oxidized Bronze, oil rubbed
613E (US10BE) Dark Oxidized Satin Bronze - Equivalent
613L Dark Oxidized Satin Bronze, Clear Coated
ANSI/BHMA 618 (US14) Bright Nickel Plated
ANSI/BHMA 619 (US15) Satin Nickel Plated
ANSI/BHMA 625 (US26) Bright Chromium Plated
ANSI/BHMA 626 (US26D) Satin Chromium Plated
626C Satin Chromium Plated with MicroShield®
ANSI/BHMA 629 (US32) VR Bright Stainless Steel
ANSI/BHMA 630 (US32D) VR Satin Stainless Steel
630C Satin Stainless Steel with MicroShield® Adjustable front
722 Black Oxidized Bronze, oil rubbed accommodates square
BSP Black Suede Powder Coat or beveled doors
1" deadbolt throw

offers security and
strength even with
excessive door
gaps
Highly engineered
3 spring design for
smooth, crisp, and
responsive operation
Heavy-duty,
two-piece 3/4"
anti-friction
latchbolt throw
requires less
force to close
door

ML2000.4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series
Outside Inside Series/Function Type ANSI No. Function Description

• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is
ML2002 locked by key either side.
Classroom
A01 A01 HSS
Intruder — • Outside grip locked or unlocked by cylinder either side.
• Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Inside grip always free.
• Lock or unlock outside grip by key.

ML2003 • Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked.
A01 HSS Classroom — • Inside grip always free.
• Auxiliary latch deadlocks latch.
ML2010 Passage • Latchbolt by grip either side.

VR HSS F01
or Closet • Both grips always free.
ML2011 • Deadbolt by key outside.

A01 Deadlock F18
VR HSS
• No inside operation.
ML2012
A01 A01 Deadlock F16 • Deadbolt by key either side.
HSS
ML2013
A01 HSS Deadlock F17 • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
• Deadbolt by key outside.

ML2017 Classroom • Thumbturn grip inside retracts deadbolt only; will not
A01 HSS
Deadlock F29 project deadbolt.
• Latchbolt by grip* either side, when deadbolt is retracted.

• Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency
ML2020 Privacy
release tool outside.
VR HSS Bedroom or F02
• No simultaneous deadbolt and latch retraction.
Bathroom • Non-panic release.
• Not available with M19S ro M19SN.
• Latchbolt by grip* either side when deadbolt is retracted.

ML2022 • Deadbolt by key either side.
A01 A01 VR HSS Store Door F14 • Latchbolt retracted by key either side.
• Non-panic release.
Indicates Indicator Indicates Indicator VR Indicates function available in Vandal Resistant Trim. * When lever handles are furnished,
option is available option is available both outside and inside are locked
HSS Indicates function available in Anti-Harm Trim.
when deadbolt is projected.
Indicates rigid grip. ML2000.5
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series

ML2024 • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
A01 Entrance or
VR HSS F21 • Latchbolt retracted by key outside.
Storeroom
• Latchbolt by grip inside and by guest key or master key

outside.
• Outside grip always rigid.
A01 • Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency key
ML2029 Hotel or
(Hotel F15 outside.
Cylinder) VR Motel • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt.
• Emergency key shuts out all other keys.
Note: Indicator shows deadbolt position only.
• Latchbolt by grip either side unless outside grip locked by
thumbturn.
ML2030 Privacy • Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency
VR Bedroom or F19 release tool outside.
Bathroom • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt
and unlocks outside grip.
• Not available with M19S or M19SN.
• Latchbolt by key either side.
• Both grips always rigid.
ML2032 Institution or • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
A01 A01
VR HSS F30
Utility Note: This function does not allow free egress and can pose
a life safety hazard in event of an emergency. Installation
should be in accordance with approved codes only.
• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked

ML2042 Entrance by key from inside.
A01 A02 or Public F09 • Latchbolt by key outside when outside grip is locked.
VR HSS
Restroom • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Latchbolt* by key outside or by grip either side, unless

outside grip is locked by toggle-action stop.
ML2048 Entrance • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
A01 F08
VR or • Inside grip free when deadbolt is retracted.
F10 • Non-panic release.
Apartment
• Latchbolt and deadbolt by grip inside or by key outside.
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt.
Storeroom • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn
A01 ML2049 — grip inside.
Deadbolt
VR • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
Half
ML2050 Dummy — • Grip acts as pull only; no operation.
Trim
• Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked by toggle

action stop.
ML2051 Entrance • Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked
A01 VR HSS F04
or Office by toggle-action stop.
Indicates rigid grip.
ML2000.6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series

• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked by
key either side.
ML2052 • Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked.
A02 A02 VR HSS Classroom
F32 • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
Intruder
• Outside grip remains locked unless unlocked by key either side.
Note: Not available with indicator, specify ML2002.
• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked or

ML2053 unlocked by key or thumbturn.
VR HSS Entrance • Outside grip locked or unlocked by key or thumbturn.
A02 —
or Office • Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked.
• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked.

• Outside grip locked or unlocked by thumbturn.
ML2054 Entrance • Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked.
A01 VR HSS F04
or Office • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Multi-function capable, see page 10 for more info.

key outside
A02
VR HSS Classroom F05 • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Outside grip remains locked unless unlocked by key.
unlocked by key.
• Latchbolt by key outside when outside grip is locked.
ML2056 Classroom • Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key, or
A02 F06
VR HSS
Holdback released by key.
Note: Not approved for use on U.L. fire listed applications.
• Latchbolt by grip inside or by key outside.

ML2057 Storeroom • Outside grip always rigid.
A01 VR HSS F07
or Closet • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.

• Outside grip locked or unlocked by key or thumbturn.
• Latchbolt retracted by key outside when outside grip is
A02 locked.
ML2058 Entrance or Office
HSS — • Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key or
Holdback
thumbturn, or released by key or thumbturn.

Security • Inside grip simultaneously retracts deadbolt & latchbolt.
A01
ML2059 Storeroom — • Outside grip always rigid.
VR Indicates function available in Vandal Resistant Trim.

ML2000.7
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Functions
ML2000 Series

• Latchbolt by grip either side, except when outside grip is
locked by thumbturn inside.
ML2060 • Operating inside grip, closing door or operating
HSS Privacy F22
emergency key outside unlocks outside grip.

by projection of deadbolt.
A01 A01 • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side.
ML2062 Intruder Deadbolt F33
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt

projection of deadbolt.
ML2065 • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or by
A01
Dormitory or
F13 thumbturn grip inside.
VR Entrance
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt and
unlocks outside grip.
toggle-action stop or by projection of deadbolt.
• Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or by
A01 Apartment thumbturn grip inside.
ML2067
VR or F20 • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt;
Dormitory outside grip remains locked.
• Outside grip unlocked by toggle-action stop.
Note: Occupancy Indicator shows deadbolt position only.

ML2068 Privacy
• Operating inside grip, closing the door or using key unlocks
A01 HSS or — outside grip.
Apartment • Inside grip always free.
• Latchbolt by grip either side, except when outside is locked

by thumbturn inside.
ML2069 Institutional • Operating inside grip or closing door unlocks outside grip.
A02 HSS F26
Privacy • Key outside retracts latch at all times, even if thumbturn is
held in locked position.
Full
ML2070 Dummy — • Grips act as pulls only; no operation.
Trim
• Latchbolt by grip from either side unless outside grip is locked

• Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side.
A01 A01 ML2072 • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt;
VR Classroom Intruder — outside grip remains locked.
• Key either side unlocks outside grip; outside grip remains
locked unless unlocked by key.
ML2000.8
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Trim Designs
ML2000 Series
ML2000, ML20900 ECL and ML20600 NAC Series
Newport
• Complies with codes requiring lever to return to
within 1/2" (13mm) of door face.
• Brass, bronze or stainless steel
• Laser engraving option
(See Custom Laser Engraving brochure)
NSA
Lever: Cast
Rose: Wrought 2-1/4
(57)
4-13/16
(122)
NSB 2-5/8*
Lever: Cast (67)
Rose: Cast
2-7/8
NSF (73)
Lever: Cast
Rose: Cast
4-13/16
(122)
2-5/8*
(67)
*Dimension from face of door, not surface of rose or escutcheon.

ML2000.26
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
TrimOverview
Designs
ML2000, ML20900 ECL and ML20600
ML2000
NAC Series
2-1/4
(57)
NSM
Lever: Cast
Escutcheon: Wrought 7-1/2
(190)
Optional: 4-13/16
(122)
• Plug only to show; master ring
• Laser engraving on lever or escutcheon
2-5/8*
(67)
2-1/4
(57)
NSN
Lever: Cast 7-1/2
Escutcheon: Wrought (190)
Optional: Laser engraving on lever 4-13/16
(122)
2-5/8*
(67)
1-5/8
(41)
NSP
Lever: Cast
7
(122)
Note: P escutcheon is not compatible with ML20900
ECL or ML20600 NAC mortise locks
2-5/8*
(67)
1-3/4
NSR (44)
Lever: Cast
Escutcheon: Solid stainless steel;
forged brass
Optional:
• Plug only to show 8-1/2
(216) 4-13/16
• Laser engraving on lever
(122)
Door thickness: 1-3/8" (35mm),
1-3/4" (44mm), 2-1/4" (57mm)
Note: R escutcheon is not available for functions 2-5/8*
ML2087 or ML20987 (67)

ML2000.27
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 14C - Lockset - Interchangeble Core - Corbin Russwin

- ML2057xNSMx32D
ML2000 Series
Mortise Locksets
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
ML2000 Series
Table of Contents Quality Aesthetics

The ML2000 Series is a Grade 1 mortise Complement any application with the full
lock designed to meet the rigors of range of trim designs and finishes offered
ML2000 Series Overview .........2 high-traffic commercial, institutional, with ML2000 Series. From stainless steel
ML2000 Series Features .......3-4 industrial and government applications. security trims to bright brass Vineyard™
Constructed of heavy-gauge steel, the levers, design continuum can be achieved
ML2000 Series Functions .....5-9 lockbody features our patented Quick without forfeiting aesthetics. For
Multi-Function Reversible latchbolt, and a 1" stainless additional information regarding designer
Configuration ..................10-11 steel deadbolt. A wide variety of trim trim, see the Corbin Russwin Vineyard™
designs and functions and a 10-year Collection and Muséo® Collection
ML20900 ECL Applications ...12 warranty lend to the ML2000’s versatility catalogs.
ML20900 ECL Features .........14 and reliability, making it the ideal choice
for use in offices, schools, hospitals, hotels
ML20900 ECL Functions ..15-16 Key Advantages
and other high-use applications.
• Patented Quick Reversible feature
ML20600 NAC Series enables reversal of hands without
Electrified Mortise Lock with Security disassembling the lock case (Patent
High Security Monitoring ......17 Further discourage intrusion and abuse pending and/or patent
NAC Functions .................18-19 with the ML2000VR (Vandal Resistant) www.assaabloydss.com/patents)
series mortise lock. This lock features • Security trims provide a vandal-
Trim Designs ....................20-39 vandal-resistant stainless steel escutcheons resistant barrier
Muséo® Trim .........................40 with tapered edges and Torx® pin tamper • Can be used with new or existing
resistant screws. When matched with Corbin Russwin key systems. Also
Muséo® Inspire™ accepts cylinders of most other
Corbin Russwin patented high-security
Roseless Trim ........................41 cylinders, any door can become a manufacturers.
Muséo® Levers .................42-54 formidable barrier to intruders. • Provides life safety and security in a
single door prep, saving the additional
Vineyard™ Collection cost of a deadlock
Trim .................................55-57 Flexible
The ML2000 Series has a multi-function • Thru-bolted trim designs for proper
Vandal Resistant Trim (VR) ......58 capability, allowing 12 functions to be alignment and increased security
configured from one lockbody. The • Multi-function lockbody
Behavioral Health
Trim (BHSS)............................59 ML2054 entrance function (ANSI F04) uses
a universal lockbody with the ability to
Behavioral Health Lever reconfigure into other functions without
Trim (BLSS)............................60 dissembling the lock case.
Push/Pull Trim (HPSK) ............. 61

Anti-Harm Trim (HSS) ............. 62
Options and Accessories....63-71
How to Order ..................72-74
Quick Codes ....................75-77
How to Specify ................78-80
Reversing Handing ................81
www.corbinrusswin.com
ML2000.2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Features
ML2000 Series
Features Hub Certification/Compliance

Handing • Knob: stainless steel, 9/32" (7mm) x ANSI/BHMA
Handed; quick reversible. The lockset can 9/32" (7mm). Certified A156.13 Series 1000,
be re-handed without disassembling the • Lever: steel, 5/16" (8mm). (Including VR ) Operational and Security Grade 1.
lock case; see page 81. Spacing Meets A117.1 Accessibility Code.
Door Thickness C. to c. knob/lever to cylinder: 3-5/8" Federal
1-3/4" (44mm) standard. (92mm). Meets FF-H-106C.
Optional door thicknesses available; see C. to c. knob/lever to thumbturn: 2-7/16"
(62mm). UL/cUL-UL10C Positive Pressure
Quick Codes, page 76. All locks listed for A label and lesser class
Backset Strike doors, 4' (122cm) x 10' (305cm) single or
2-3/4" (70mm). Wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel, 8' (244cm) x 10' (305cm) pair (3 hour fire
ANSI straight lip standard, 4-7/8" (124mm) door). Letter F and UL symbol on armored
Lockcase x 1-1/4" (32mm) x 1-1/8" (29mm) lip to
Heavy-gauge steel, 5-7/8" (149mm) x 4" front indicate listing.
center. Optional strikes, lip lengths and
(102mm) x 15/16" (24mm). ANSI wrought strike box available; see Any retrofit or other field modification to
Optional: non-ferrous lockcase for Quick Codes, page 76. a fire rated opening can potentially impact
corrosion resistance; see Quick Codes, Cylinder the fire rating of the opening, and Corbin
page 76. Brass, 6-pin, L4 keyway, 0-bitted standard. Russwin, Inc. makes no representations or
Front Optional cylinders available; see Quick warranties concerning what such impact
Heavy-gauge steel, 8" (203mm) x 1-1/4" Codes, page 75. may be in any specific situation. When
(32mm) x -3/32" (2mm). Accommodates retrofitting any portion of an existing fire-
Keys rated opening, or specifying and installing
flat doors and doors beveled 1/8" (3mm)
Two nickel silver standard. a new fire-rated opening, please consult
in 2" (51mm). Furnished 1-1/16" (27mm),
optional D138, wide for 1-3/8" (35mm) Keying Features Available with a code specialist or local code official
doors. Master keying (Authority Having Jurisdiction) to ensure
Construction master keying compliance with all applicable codes and
Armored Front ratings.
Visual key control
Wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel
Concealed key control California State Reference Code
attached by machine screws to lockcase
Plug only to show (concealed shell) (Formerly Title 19, California State Fire Marshal
front. ML2000VR utilizes security Torx®
7-pin cylinder Standard)
screws.
Security cylinder All levers with returns, return to within
Latchbolt
Access 3® cylinder 1/2" (13mm) of door face.
2-piece mechanical with anti-friction
Pyramid cylinder Windstorm/Hurricane
insert, 5/8" (16mm) x 1" (25mm) x 3/4"
Interchangeable core (IC) Certified (refer to local codes).
(19mm) throw.
Security IC
Auxiliary Latchbolt Pyramid IC
9/16" (14mm) effective throw and Access 3® IC
3/8" (10mm) effective auxiliary latch Master ring cylinder
deadlocking. Blockout cylinder
Deadbolt Flex head cylinder
One-piece stainless steel, 19/32" (15mm) Warranty
x 1-1/4" (32mm) x 1" (25mm) throw. Ten-year limited.
Occupancy Indicator
Occupancy indicators for use with ML2000
x sectional trim. Design features option
for dual indicators on double cylinder
functions, confirming door is secured from
either side. Emergency override standard
for all non-keyed functions.
ML2000.3
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Features
ML2000 Series
Finishes
ANSI/BHMA 605 (US3) Bright Brass
ANSI/BHMA 606 (US4) Satin Brass
ANSI/BHMA 611 (US9) Bright Bronze
ANSI/BHMA 612 (US10) Satin Bronze
ANSI/BHMA 613 (US10B) Oxidized Bronze, oil rubbed
613E (US10BE) Dark Oxidized Satin Bronze - Equivalent
613L Dark Oxidized Satin Bronze, Clear Coated
ANSI/BHMA 618 (US14) Bright Nickel Plated
ANSI/BHMA 619 (US15) Satin Nickel Plated
ANSI/BHMA 625 (US26) Bright Chromium Plated
ANSI/BHMA 626 (US26D) Satin Chromium Plated
626C Satin Chromium Plated with MicroShield®
ANSI/BHMA 629 (US32) VR Bright Stainless Steel
ANSI/BHMA 630 (US32D) VR Satin Stainless Steel
630C Satin Stainless Steel with MicroShield® Adjustable front
722 Black Oxidized Bronze, oil rubbed accommodates square
BSP Black Suede Powder Coat or beveled doors
1" deadbolt throw

offers security and
strength even with
excessive door
gaps
Highly engineered
3 spring design for
smooth, crisp, and
responsive operation
Heavy-duty,
two-piece 3/4"
anti-friction
latchbolt throw
requires less
force to close
door

ML2000.4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series

• Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is
ML2002 locked by key either side.
Classroom
A01 A01 HSS
Intruder — • Outside grip locked or unlocked by cylinder either side.
• Lock or unlock outside grip by key.

ML2003 • Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked.
A01 HSS Classroom — • Inside grip always free.
ML2010 Passage • Latchbolt by grip either side.

VR HSS F01
or Closet • Both grips always free.
ML2011 • Deadbolt by key outside.

A01 Deadlock F18
VR HSS
• No inside operation.
ML2012
A01 A01 Deadlock F16 • Deadbolt by key either side.
HSS
ML2013
A01 HSS Deadlock F17 • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
• Deadbolt by key outside.

ML2017 Classroom • Thumbturn grip inside retracts deadbolt only; will not
A01 HSS
Deadlock F29 project deadbolt.
• Latchbolt by grip* either side, when deadbolt is retracted.

• Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency
ML2020 Privacy
release tool outside.
VR HSS Bedroom or F02
Bathroom • Non-panic release.
• Not available with M19S ro M19SN.

ML2022 • Deadbolt by key either side.
A01 A01 VR HSS Store Door F14 • Latchbolt retracted by key either side.
Indicates rigid grip. ML2000.5
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series

ML2024 • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
A01 Entrance or
VR HSS F21 • Latchbolt retracted by key outside.
Storeroom
• Latchbolt by grip inside and by guest key or master key

outside.
A01 • Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency key
ML2029 Hotel or
(Hotel F15 outside.
Cylinder) VR Motel • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt.
• Emergency key shuts out all other keys.
thumbturn.
ML2030 Privacy • Deadbolt by thumbturn grip inside or by emergency
VR Bedroom or F19 release tool outside.
Bathroom • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt
• Latchbolt by key either side.
• Both grips always rigid.
ML2032 Institution or • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
A01 A01
VR HSS F30
Utility Note: This function does not allow free egress and can pose
a life safety hazard in event of an emergency. Installation
should be in accordance with approved codes only.

ML2042 Entrance by key from inside.
A01 A02 or Public F09 • Latchbolt by key outside when outside grip is locked.
VR HSS
Restroom • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Latchbolt* by key outside or by grip either side, unless

outside grip is locked by toggle-action stop.
ML2048 Entrance • Deadbolt by key outside or by thumbturn grip inside.
A01 F08
VR or • Inside grip free when deadbolt is retracted.
F10 • Non-panic release.
Apartment
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt.
Storeroom • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn
A01 ML2049 — grip inside.
Deadbolt
VR • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
Half
ML2050 Dummy — • Grip acts as pull only; no operation.
Trim
• Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked by toggle

action stop.
ML2051 Entrance • Latchbolt by grip either side, unless outside grip is locked
A01 VR HSS F04
or Office by toggle-action stop.
ML2000.6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Functions
Overview
ML2000 Series

key either side.
A02 A02 VR HSS Classroom
F32 • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
Intruder
• Outside grip remains locked unless unlocked by key either side.

ML2053 unlocked by key or thumbturn.
VR HSS Entrance • Outside grip locked or unlocked by key or thumbturn.
A02 —
or Office • Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked.

• Outside grip locked or unlocked by thumbturn.
ML2054 Entrance • Latchbolt by key when outside grip locked.
A01 VR HSS F04
or Office • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Multi-function capable, see page 10 for more info.

key outside
A02
VR HSS Classroom F05 • Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt.
• Outside grip remains locked unless unlocked by key.
unlocked by key.
• Latchbolt by key outside when outside grip is locked.
ML2056 Classroom • Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key, or
A02 F06
VR HSS
Holdback released by key.
• Latchbolt by grip inside or by key outside.

ML2057 Storeroom • Outside grip always rigid.
A01 VR HSS F07

• Latchbolt retracted by key outside when outside grip is
A02 locked.
ML2058 Entrance or Office
HSS — • Latchbolt can be held in a retracted position by key or
Holdback
thumbturn, or released by key or thumbturn.

Security • Inside grip simultaneously retracts deadbolt & latchbolt.
A01
ML2059 Storeroom — • Outside grip always rigid.
VR Indicates function available in Vandal Resistant Trim.

ML2000.7
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Functions
ML2000 Series

• Latchbolt by grip either side, except when outside grip is
locked by thumbturn inside.
ML2060 • Operating inside grip, closing door or operating
HSS Privacy F22
emergency key outside unlocks outside grip.

A01 A01 • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side.
ML2062 Intruder Deadbolt F33
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt

projection of deadbolt.
ML2065 • Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or by
A01
Dormitory or
F13 thumbturn grip inside.
VR Entrance
• Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt and
unlocks outside grip.
toggle-action stop or by projection of deadbolt.
• Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or by
A01 Apartment thumbturn grip inside.
ML2067
VR or F20 • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt;
Dormitory outside grip remains locked.
• Outside grip unlocked by toggle-action stop.
Note: Occupancy Indicator shows deadbolt position only.

ML2068 Privacy
• Operating inside grip, closing the door or using key unlocks
A01 HSS or — outside grip.
Apartment • Inside grip always free.
• Latchbolt by grip either side, except when outside is locked

by thumbturn inside.
ML2069 Institutional • Operating inside grip or closing door unlocks outside grip.
A02 HSS F26
Privacy • Key outside retracts latch at all times, even if thumbturn is
held in locked position.
Full
ML2070 Dummy — • Grips act as pulls only; no operation.
Trim
• Latchbolt by grip from either side unless outside grip is locked

• Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side.
A01 A01 ML2072 • Inside grip simultaneously retracts latchbolt and deadbolt;
VR Classroom Intruder — outside grip remains locked.
• Key either side unlocks outside grip; outside grip remains
locked unless unlocked by key.
ML2000.8
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Overview
Trim Designs
ML2000 Series
ML2000, ML20900 ECL and ML20600 NAC Series
Newport
• Complies with codes requiring lever to return to
within 1/2" (13mm) of door face.
• Brass, bronze or stainless steel
• Laser engraving option
(See Custom Laser Engraving brochure)
NSA
Lever: Cast
Rose: Wrought 2-1/4
(57)
4-13/16
(122)
NSB 2-5/8*
Lever: Cast (67)
Rose: Cast
2-7/8
NSF (73)
Lever: Cast
Rose: Cast
4-13/16
(122)
2-5/8*
(67)

ML2000.26
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
TrimOverview
Designs
ML2000, ML20900 ECL and ML20600
ML2000
NAC Series
2-1/4
(57)
NSM
Lever: Cast
Escutcheon: Wrought 7-1/2
(190)
Optional: 4-13/16
(122)
• Plug only to show; master ring
• Laser engraving on lever or escutcheon
2-5/8*
(67)
2-1/4
(57)
NSN
Lever: Cast 7-1/2
(122)
2-5/8*
(67)
1-5/8
(41)
NSP
Lever: Cast
7
(122)
Note: P escutcheon is not compatible with ML20900
ECL or ML20600 NAC mortise locks
2-5/8*
(67)
1-3/4
NSR (44)
Lever: Cast
Escutcheon: Solid stainless steel;
forged brass
Optional:
• Plug only to show 8-1/2
(216) 4-13/16
• Laser engraving on lever
(122)
Door thickness: 1-3/8" (35mm),
1-3/4" (44mm), 2-1/4" (57mm)
Note: R escutcheon is not available for functions 2-5/8*
ML2087 or ML20987 (67)

ML2000.27
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
MAGNASPHERE
Tag # 18 - Magnetic Switch
- Magnasphere - MSS-312-C
MSS-300 C-E Series (Recessed)
MSSuhXXCuE NOMENCLATURE SIZE

Magnasphere
Recessed:Contact IW:[ZVmm]:Diag
Electrical:Specifications
Concealed: Max:Current7:KgZVA:Resistive:
hBvW:[ZKmm]:L Max:Voltage7:hK:VDC
G:of:open:loops Max:Power7:gZV:W:Resistive:
MSS:u:h::x:::x::C:u:E ZgDZVW:[DP:mm]
Triple:loop:capacity IgPVW:[vV:mm]
G:of:closed:loops IuIBwW gKwW

[Z/mm]: [Zmm]
Extended:Range: Leads7:ZZ:AWG:IZW:[hKgVcm]
Housing:Color7:BLACK
IW:[ZVmm]:Diag
MAX:Gap
IBZW::[IZgPmm]
NOTE::CONTACT:STATE:SHOWN:WITH:TARGET:MAGNET:IN:PLACE
Available Part Numbers
MSSuhKhCuE
RED
Closed
Loop
RED
BLK Closed
Loop
BLK
WHT Closed
Loop
WHT
MSSuhIZCuE
RED Open
Loop
RED
BLK Closed
Loop
BLK
WHT Closed
Loop
WHT
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 20 - Pushbutton Lock - Simplex LL1021M

USBP uses the LL1021M instead of the EE1021M on their aluminum door. The knobs are EE and Levers are
LL. The knobs will create a knuckle buster/pinch point with the door frame.
Simplex ®
L1000
Features
Access Control
Mechanical pushbutton lock—eliminates problems and costs associated
with issuing, controlling, and collecting keys and cards. Provides exterior
access by combination, while allowing free egress
No Battery
Fully mechanical lock eliminates the material and labor expense of
battery replacements
Number of Codes
Single access code—one easy-to-manage code for all users
Programming
Lock is easily programmed via keypad without removing lock from
the door
Handing
)DFWRU\KDQGHGQRW¿HOGUHYHUVLEOH
Key Override (Optional)

Small format interchangeable cores, large format removable cores
Operation Modes
Pushbutton Access
Passage (select models)—allows access without using the lock entry
code. Feature activated from the inside with a thumbturn or key
(included with all passage feature models).
Privacy (select models)—disables the lock from the inside so that the
entry code cannot be used to gain access. Access is permitted using the
key override only when in this mode.
Economical
$FRVWHɣHFWLYHDFFHVVFRQWURO solution
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Mechanical Features
Construction Heavy-duty cylindrical lock KRXVLQJZLWKFDVWIURQWKRXVLQJXQL¿HGWULPSODWHDQG¿[HG

ADA-compliant levers
Locking Device &\OLQGULFDOODWFKZLWKɴKRXU8/8/&¿UHUDWLQJRQ³$ÓDEHOHGGRRUV
Numeric Keypad Vandal resistant, solid metal pushbuttons
Handing )DFWRU\KDQGHGQRW¿HOGUHYHUVLEOH
Standard Finishes Satin Chrome 26D (626), Antique Brass 05 (609)
Optional Finishes Bright Brass 03 (605), Bright Chrome 026 (625)
Backset ɳôɸɱPPɳƘɷɱmm)
Latch ½" (13 mm) throw latch, ¾" (19 mm) throw latch (optional)
Minimum Stile Recommended 5" (127 mm)
Weight 8.25 lbs. (3.7 kg)
Strike Standard strike plate; ASA strike plate
Key Override
Interchangeable Cores Small format—Best and equivalents (6 or 7-pin length); core not included
Removable Cores Large format—Medeco/ASSA/Yale/Abloy (5 or 6-pin length); Corbin Russwin (6-pin length);
Schlage, and Sargent; core not included
Installation
Door Preparation Easily installs on wood or metal doors. ASA 161 door preparation with additional through holes.
Pre-assembled to accommodate 1 ƙ" (41mm) to 1 ƚ" (48mm) doors. Hardware included to cover
Door Thickness door thickness applications:1 Ƙ" (35mm) to 1½" (38mm), 2" (51mm) to 2 ¼" (57mm)
Certification and Testing
Accessibility Standard $PHULFDQVZLWK'LVDELOLWLHV$FW$'$¿[HG$'$FRPSOLDQWOHYHUV
Durability D.O.D. Compliant 5220.22M for supplemental access control; weather resistant
Fire Rating ɴKRXU8/8/&¿UHUDWLQJIRU³$ÓDEHOHGGRRUV
Warranty
Warranty 3-year warranty
ɳƘ
(60 mm)
1
2
3
9"
4 (229 mm)
5
ɸƘ
(187 mm) ½"
(13 mm)
ɴƗ 3 13»16" 1 15»16" 3 ¼"

(79 mm) (97 mm) (49 mm) (83 mm)
Exterior Exterior Side Latch Interior
Model L101x Model L102x Model L103x Model L104x Model L1076
&RPELQDWLRQ(QWU\ &RPELQDWLRQ(QWU\ &RPELQDWLRQ(QWU\ &RPELQDWLRQ(QWU\ &RPELQDWLRQ(QWU\

,QWHULRU&RPELQDWLRQ&KDQJH .H\2YHUULGHQRWVXSSOLHG ,QWHULRU&RPELQDWLRQ&KDQJH .H\2YHUULGHQRWVXSSOLHG .H\2YHUULGHQRWVXSSOLHG
,QWHULRU&RPELQDWLRQ&KDQJH 3DVVDJH ,QWHULRU&RPELQDWLRQ&KDQJH ,QWHULRU&RPELQDWLRQ&KDQJH
3DVVDJH 3ULYDF\ORFNRXWDYDLODEOHRQ
2X
key override models only
Kaba Access & Data Systems Americas

Winston-Salem NC 27105
1-800-849-8324
www.kaba-adsamericas.com KAA1350 0316
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Changing the Code/Combination

Simplex 1000/L1000
Note: If your lock is opening on every turn of the knob or lever, except upon entering a code, this may
be a ZERO CODE. Before attempting to remove the lock from the door, refer to the troubleshooting
procedures outlined at bottom of this document for a zero code symptom/solution.
1000/L1000 Series FAQ

Changing the Code/Combination
The door must be open.

On models with the passage feature, make sure the passage feature is disen-
gaged: turn knob or key should be in vertical position (A) (see figure 1).

1. Insert the DF-59 control key (B) into the combination change plug
assembly (C) and unscrew the cylinder by turning the key
counterclockwise. Remove the combination change plug to gain access
to the combination change sleeve (see figure 1).

2. Turn the outside knob/lever once clockwise (all the way, until it stops)
then release. The latch should not retract (see figure 4).

3. Enter the existing combination. On new installations, use the factory-
set combination: depress 2 and 4 simultaneously, (release), then 3
(release). You should feel a slight click as each button is depressed.

4. Insert the spanner wrench as shown in figure 2 to engage the combina-
tion change sleeve (A). Gently turn the spanner wrench clockwise to
the stop position (a slight click should be felt), then turn the spanner
wrench counter-clockwise to the stop position (A) (see figure 3). Remove
the spanner wrench.

5. Turn the outside knob/lever once clockwise all the way until it stops,
then release. The latch should not retract (see figure 4).

6. Choose your new combination, write it down, then enter the new
combination—depress buttons carefully (a slight click should be felt as
each button is depressed).
Note: You can use one button or all five for a combination, but each button can
only be used once. You can depress two or more buttons simultaneously as a
step in the combination.
7. Turn the outside knob/lever clockwise once, all the way, until it stops,
hold in position and make sure the latch is retracted (see figure 5).
Release the knob/lever.

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
8. Turn the knob/lever clockwise again to the stop position. At this point, the latch (A) should
not retract unless you enter the new combination (see figure 4).

9. Re-secure the combination change plug assembly by screwing it in clockwise with the
DF-59 key—do not overtighten (see figure 6). Remove the key and store it in a secure area
with these instructions and the spanner wrench.

Troubleshooting
Symptom/problem: Outside knob/lever when turned always retracts latch without depressing
any buttons.
Cause: Lock is in zero combination.
Solution: Follow the procedure for changing a combination except omit step 3 (do not enter
the existing combination).
KAA1163 0108
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
NOTICE: EFFECTIVE 12/15/2010

This document supercedes all prior revisions.
Resetting an Unknown Combination

Remove the combination chamber from the lock.
Cover Removal is NO Longer Required and Should NEVER be COVER SHOULD NEVER
Removed for Lost Code Retrieval. BE REMOVED
1. Hold the chamber in one hand by the screw tab (b) on each end with Fig. 1
the key-stems (c) facing you and the control shaft (d) at the bottom
(See Figure 2). b
2. Using pliers or equivalent, rotate the control shaft (d) counterclock-
wise and release to clear the chamber (See Figure 2).
3. Look at the 5 code gears (e) found inside the oblong windows. If any
code gear pockets (f) are already at the shear line (open position), c (5)
ignore them. They are not used in the combination (See Figure 3).
Note: Shear line (open position) references the “L” shaped feet already
aligned with the mating gear pocket. d
4. Find the code gear pocket/s (f) that is farthest away from the shear
line (open position). Depress that key-stem/s (c) and release (See
Figure 3). If any code gear pockets are equal distance from the shear
Fig. 2 b
line, then they must be depressed together to reset the combination.
5. Find the code gear pocket/s (f) that is the next farthest away from
the shear line (open position). Depress that key-stem/s (c) and g
c (5)
release (See Figure 3).
Note: If any of the code gear pockets travel past the shear line, the key-
stems have been depressed in the wrong sequence. Start over at step 2.
6. Repeat step 5 until all code gear pockets (f) are at the shear line (open
position). e (5) e (5)
7. If all the code gear pockets (f) are not lined up at the shear line (open d
position), start over at step 2.
f
8. Depress the lockout slide (g) at the top of the chamber and release
(looks like one end of a spark plug) (See Figure 3). f
9. Using pliers or equivalent, rotate the control shaft (d) counterclockwise Fig. 3
to clear the chamber and release. The lockout slide (g) should pop out
g
(button underneath will stay depressed) (See Figure 4). h c (5)
10. Depress the key-stem/s (c) that you want in the combination,
releasing each after it is depressed (See Figure 4).
11. Once all the digits in the new combination have been depressed, with
the pliers or equivalent, rotate the control shaft (d) clockwise (See e (5)
Figure 4). The code change button (h) underneath the lockout slide
(g), should pop up (See Figure 4). The new combination is now set.
d
12. Look at the code gear pockets (f). The numbers in the new combina-
f
tion should not be at the shear line (open position) (See Figure 4).
Reinstallation: Reinstall the chamber into the lock.
Fig. 4
Testing: Turn outside knob/lever and release (for thumbturn models,
turn counter-clockwise). Enter code. Turn knob/lever (for thumbturn
models, turn clockwise). Latch should retract. Kaba Access Control
PKG3216EFS 0111
2941 Indiana Avenue,

Winston-Salem, NC 27105 U.S.A.
For Spanish and French, visit www.kabaaccess.com Tel. 800.849.8324 or 336.725.1331
www.kabaaccess.com
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installation instructions included for

record and information only. Locks
would be installed in FEBR doors from
factory.
Simplex® l1000 Series

English
Installation Instructions
Español
Instrucciones de Instalación
Français
Instructions d’installation
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
English Español
Table of Contents Indice
TEP
S PAGE PASO PÁGINA
1 Marking the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1 Marcación de la puerta . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 Drilling the holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 Perforación de los agujeros . . . . . . . . 6
3 Installing the latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3 Instalación del pestillo . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4a Adjusting the lock for doors 4a Ajuste de la cerradura para puertas
13⁄8” (35 mm) to 11⁄2” (38 mm) thick . 10 de 13⁄8 pulg. (35 mm) a
11⁄2 pulg. (38 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4b Adjusting the lock for doors
2” (51 mm) to 21⁄4” (57 mm) thick . . 10 4b Ajuste de la cerradura para puertas
de 2 pulg. (51 mm) a 2 1⁄4 pulg.
5 Installing the lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 (57 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6 Testing the operation of the lock . . 14 5 Instalación de la cerradura . . . . . . . 14
7 Installing the reinforcing plate . . . . 14 6 Pruebas de funcionamiento
8 Installing the passage set . . . . . . . 16 de la cerradura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
9 Installing the inside trim plate . . . . . 16 7 Instalación de la placa de refuerzo 16
10 Installing the inside lever . . . . . . . . 18 8 Instalación del dispositivo
de paso libre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
11 Installing the combination
change plug assembly . . . . . . . . . . 18 9 Instalación de la placa interior . . . . 16
12 Installing the strike plate . . . . . . . . . 22 10 Instalación de la manija del
lado de adentro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
13 Installing the key override cylinder . 24
11 Instalación del cilindro para
14 Changing the combination . . . . . . . 26 cambiar la combinación . . . . . . . . . 18
15 Combination setting record . . . . . . 28 12 Instalación de la contra . . . . . . . . . 22
16 Using the passage function . . . . . . 30 13 Instalación del cilindro dominante . . . .
17 Preserving the latch . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 de la invalidación . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18 Reset an unknown combination . . . 34 14 Cambio de la combinación . . . . . . . 26
19 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 15 Registro de combinaciones . . . . . . 28
Template . . . . . . . . . . . . center of book 16 Función de paso libre . . . . . . . . . . . 30
17 Mantenimiento del pestillo . . . . . . . 30
Warranty card . . . . . . . . center of book
18 Reajuste una combinación
Please read and follow all directions desconocida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
carefully 19 Determinación de fallas . . . . . . . . . 38
Since correct installation is critical, carefully Plantilla . . . . . . . . . . . Centro del folleto
check windows, frame, door, etc. to make
Tarjeta de garantia . . Centro del folleto
sure that the recommended procedures will
not cause any damage. Lea y siga cuidadosamente todas las
KABA is not responsible for any damage instrucciones
caused by installation. Dado que es muy importante instalar
L1000 series locks are handed at the correctamente la cerradura, verifique
factory and cannot be changed in the meticulosamente las ventanas, el marco,
field. la puerta, etcétera, para asegurarse de que
no se dañen con el método recomendado.
KABA no se hace responsable por ningún
daño causado por la instalación.
La manija de las cerraduras de la Serie
L1000 se fija en la fábrica y no puede cam-
biarse en el lugar de instalación.
2
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Français For your records

Table des matières
TAPE
É PAGE
Model #:_______________________
1 Marquage de la porte . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Perçage des trous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Date Purchased:________________
3 Installation du pêne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Dealer:________________________
4a Ajustement de la serrure
pour portes de 13⁄8” (35 mm) à Name:________________________
11⁄2” (38 mm) d’épaisseur . . . . . . . . 11
4b Ajustement de la serrure Telephone:_____________________
pour portes de 2” (51 mm) à
21⁄4” (57 mm) d’épaisseur . . . . . . . . . 13
5 Installation de la serrure . . . . . . . . . 13
6 Vérification du fonctionnement
de la serrure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Para su archivo
7 Installation de la plaque
de renfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
8 Installation du libre-accès . . . . . . . . 17 Modelo n° :____________________
9 Installation de la plaque Fecha de compra :______________
de garniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
10 Installation de la béquille Distribuidor :___________________
intérieure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Nombre :______________________
11 Installation du cylindre de
changement de combinaison . . . . . 19 Teléfono:______________________
12 Installation de la gâche . . . . . . . . . 22
13 Installation du cylindre principal . . . .
de priorité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
14 Changement de la combinaison . . 26
15 Registre des combinaisons . . . . . . 28 Pour vos dossiers
16 Utilisation de la fonction
de libre-accès . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
17 Alignement entre la porte et N° de modèle :_________________
le jambage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Date d’achat :__________________
18 Remettez à zéro une
combinaison inconnue . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fournisseur :___________________
19 Dépannage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Nom :_________________________
Gabarit . . . . . . . . . . au centre du livret
Carte de garantie . . au centre du livret Téléphone :____________________
Veuillez lire et suivre

attentivement les instructions
S’assurer que l’installation de la serrure ne
causera aucun dommage à la fenêtre, au
jambage ou à la porte.
KABA décline toute responsabilité pour tout
dommage résultant de
l’installation.
La main des serrures de la série L1000
est définie à l’usine et ne peut être
changée.
3
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Checklist Lista de verificación

Each L1000 Series lockset includes: Cada cerradura de la Serie 1000 incluye:
o A) Front lock housing assembly o A) Caja delantera de la cerradura
o B) Latch o B) Pestillo
o C) Reinforcing plate o C) Placa de refuerzo
o D) Inside trim plate o D) Placa interior
o E) Inside lever o E) Palanca interior
o Screw/accessory pack: o Juego de tornillos/accesorios:
a) strike box a) caja guardapolvo
b) strike plate b) contra
c) combination change plug assembly c) cilindro para cambiar la combinación
d) two DF59 keys d) dos llaves DF59
e) thread ring e) aro roscado
f) extra spacer f) espaciador adicional
g) rubber bumpers g) topes de caucho
h) one extra cross pin h) un pasador transversal adicional
i) spanner wrench i) llave de arco
j) four 8-32 x 3⁄4” (19 mm) j) cuatro tornillos Phillips, 8-32 x 3⁄4 pulg.
Phillips combination screws (19 mm),para la combinación
(for latch and strike) (para pestillo y contra)
k) four 8-32 x 3⁄16” (5 mm) Phillips sems k) cuatro tornillos Phillips con
screws (for cylindrical drive unit) arandela premontada,
l) four 8-32 x 11⁄16” (17 mm) Phillips sems 8-32 x 3⁄16 pulg. (5 mm)
screws (for cylindrical drive unit) (para la unidad cilíndrica)
m) two 8-32 x 21⁄2” (64 mm) screws l) cuatro tornillos Phillips con
(for mounting) arandela premontada,
Models 103x, 104x only 8-32 x 11⁄16 pulg. (17 mm)
n) passage set assemblies (para la unidad cilíndrica)
m) dos tornillos 8-32 x 21⁄2 pulg.
p) spring clip for passage set (64 mm) (para el montaje)
Tools required: Modelos 103x, 104x únicamente
o Electric drill (variable speed) n) montajes determinados del paso
o Awl or center punch p) abrazadera sujetadora para paso libre
o 21⁄8” (54 mm) Hole saw with pilot drill Herramientas necesarias:
o 1” (25 mm) Hole saw with pilot drill o Taladro eléctrico (de velocidad variable)
o 1⁄4” (6 mm) Drill bit o Punzón o punzón centrador
o 1” (25 mm) Wood chisel o Taladro con broca de guía de 21⁄8 pulg.
(54 mm)
o Hammer
o Taladro con broca de guía de 1 pulg.
o Phillips head screwdriver (25mm)
o Small flat blade screwdriver o Punta de broca de 1⁄4 pulg. (6mm)
o Pliers (2) for passage set locks only o Cincel puntiagudo de 1 pulg. (25 mm)
o Martillo
o Destornillador para tornillos Phillips
o Destornillador ordinario, pequeño
o Pinzas (2) para las cerraduras con paso
libre únicamente
4
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Liste de vérification
Chaque serrure de la série 1000 comprend :
o A) Boîtier de serrure
o B) Pêne
o C) Plaque de renfort
o D) Plaque de garniture
o E) Béquille intérieure B
o Vis/ensemble d’accessoires :
a) boîtier antipoussière A
b) gâche
c) cylindre de changement de
combinaison
d) 2 clés DF59
e) bague filetée
f) entretoise supplémentaire
g) butée de caoutchouc
h) contre-goupille supplémentaire
i) clé à ergot
j) 4 vis à tête combinée Phillips
8-32 x 3⁄4” (19 mm) E
pour pêne et gâche D
k) 4 vis «sem» à rondelle captive
Phillips 8-32 x 3⁄16” C
(5 mm) pour unité cylindrique
d’entraînement a
l) 4 vis «sem» à rondelle captive
Phillips 8-32 x 11⁄16” c
b d
(17 mm) pour unité cylindrique
d’entraînement e
m) 2 vis de montage 8-32 x 21⁄2” (64 mm) g
f
Modèles 103x & 104x seulement h
n) passages réglés k i
j
p) agrafe élastique pour libre-accès l
Outils requis: m
o Perceuse électrique (à vitesse variable)
o Poinçon ou pointeau
o Scie-cloche de 21⁄8” (54 mm)
avec foret-guide
o Scie-cloche de 1” (25mm) avec foret-guide
o Foret de 1⁄4” (6 mm)
n
o Ciseau à bois de 1” (25 mm)
o Marteau
o Tournevis Phillips
o Tournevis à petite lame plate
o Pinces (2) pour les serrures avec mode p
libre-accès seulement
5
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Marking the door Marcación de la puerta

1
The door to frame relationship is critical for La relación entre la puerta y el marco es
the performance and durability of the muy importante para el rendimiento y dura-
KABA latch mechanism. The vertical and bilidad del mecanismo que acciona el pestil-
horizontal center lines are important when lo KABA. Las líneas centrales, horizontal y
positioning the lock, strike, and latch; they vertical, son importantes, al colocar lacer-
must be according to ANSI standard radura, la hembra y el pestillo. Deben
A115.2. responder a la norma ANSI A115.2.
1. Fold the paper template (found in the 1. Pliegue, tal como se indica, la plantilla de
middle of this booklet) on the line as papel (en la página central de este folleto).
indicated. Models without passage Los modelos sin paso libre (L101x, L102x,
feature (L101x, L102x, L1076) use tem- L1076) utilizan la plantilla A; los modelos
plate A; models with passage feature con paso libre (L103x, L104x) usan la
(L103x, L104x) use template B. plantilla B.
2. Tape the template securely to the door 2. Adhiera la plantilla a la puerta con una
so that all the indicated folds are proper- cinta, de manera tal que todos los pliegues
ly aligned with the high beveled edge of indicados queden bien alineados con el
the door. canto biselado alto de la puerta.
Caution: When a frame has an existing Precaución: cuando un marco tiene una hem-
strike, be sure to locate the strike template bra, asegúrese de colocar la plantilla de la hem-
so that the latch hole center is directly bra, de manera tal que el centro del agujero por
aligned with the center of the strike cutout donde entra el pestillo quede directamente alin-
(A). eado con el centro del recorte de la hembra (A).
3. Marque la puerta siguiendo las indicaciones
3. Mark the door as indicated on the
de la plantilla, utilizando una punta de pun-
template, using a center punch. Models
zón. Los modelos L101x, L102x, L1076 sin
L101x, L102x, L1076 without passage
paso libre requieren 5 agujeros (plantilla A);
feature require 5 holes (template A);
los modelos L103x, L104x con paso libre
models L103x, L104x with passage fea-
requieren 6 agujeros (B) (plantilla B). Vea la
ture require 6 holes (B)
ilustración 1-1.
(template B). See Figure 1-1.
4. Quite la plantilla de la puerta después de
4. Remove the template from door after all haber marcado bien todos los puntos de
drill points have been clearly marked. perforación.
Note: To cover existing holes in wood or Nota: Para cubrir los agujeros que haya en
metal doors, a filler plate may be used las puertas de madera o metal, utilice placas
(available for 13⁄4” (44 mm) thick doors de relleno (disponibles para puertas de 13⁄4
only). pulg. (44 mm) de espesor únicamente).
Drilling the holes Perforación de los agujeros

2
1. Use a hole saw with a pilot drill bit to drill 1. Use un taladro, con broca central de
the 21⁄8” (54 mm) hole: apply pressure guía, para hacer un agujero de 21⁄8 pulg.
evenly until the circular blade cuts the (54 mm): presione en forma uniforme
first side of the door and the tip of the hasta que la hoja circular corte un lado
pilot bit emerges through the other side, de la puerta y la punta de la broca de
then stop. guía salga por el otro lado. Luego
deténgase.
6
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Marquage de la porte
L’alignement entre la porte et le bâti est B

primordial pour la durabilité et le bon
fonctionnement du pêne KABA. Les axes
vertical et horizontal, en prévision de la ser- A
rure, de la gâche et du pêne devront être
conformes aux normes *ANSI A115.2.
1. Plier le gabarit (qui se trouve au centre
de ce livret) sur le repère de pliage.
Utiliser le gabarit A pour les modèles 1-1
sans libre-accès (L101x, L102x, L1076)
et le gabarit B pour les modèles avec
libre-accès (L103x, L104x).
2. Fixer le gabarit sur la porte de manière à
aligner les repères de pliage avec le
côté proéminent du biseau du chant de
porte.
Attention : Si le jambage est déjà pourvu
d’une gâche, placer le gabarit de la gâche
de façon à aligner le centre du diamètre du
pêne avec le centre du pourtour de la gâche
(A).
3. Marquer la porte selon le gabarit. Les
modèles sans libre-accès (L101x,
L102x, L1076) nécessitent 5 trous
(gabarit A) et les modèles (L103x, L104x
avec libre-accès nécessitent 6 trous
(gabarit B). (Voir figure 1-1.)
4. Enlever le gabarit dès que les trous ont
été clairement marqués.
Note: Pour cacher des trous dans une
porte de bois ou de métal, utiliser des
plaques de recouvrement (pour portes de
13⁄4” (44 mm) d’épaisseur seulement).
⁄4” (6mm)
1
1” (25mm)
Perçage des trous A

1” (25mm)
1” (25mm)
1. Utiliser une scie-cloche munie d’un
foret-guide pour percer le trou de 21⁄8”
(54 mm) : appliquer une pression
uniformément jusqu’à ce que la lame 2 1⁄4” (54mm)
circulaire du foret-guide apparaisse sur 2-1
l’autre côté de la porte.
7
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Drilling the holes Perforación de los agujeros

2 Continued Continuación
2. Drill through the other side of the door 2. Taladre por el otro lado de la puerta
until the 21⁄8” (54 mm) circular hole is hasta terminar de cortar el agujero de
completed. 21⁄8 pulg. (54 mm).
3. Use a hole saw with a pilot drill bit to drill 3. Utilice un taladro con broca central de
the 1” (25 mm) hole in the door face. guía para hacer un agujero de 1 pulg.
Passage feature models require an (25 mm) en la cara de la puerta (A),
additional 1” (25 mm) hole in the door ilustración 2-1. Los modelos con paso
face (A) figure 2-1 (repeat same drilling libre requieren un agujero adicional de 1
procedure as before). pulg. (25 mm) en la cara de la puerta
4. Use standard drill bits to drill the two (repita el mismo procedimiento anterior).
1
⁄4” (6 mm) holes for the mounting 4. Utilice brocas comunes para taladrar los
screws. dos agujeros de 1⁄4 pulg. (6 mm) donde
5. Drill the final 1” (25 mm) hole for the van los tornillos de montaje.
latch through the edge of the door. Drill 5. Taladre el último agujero de 1 pulg.
until the hole saw is visible through the (25 mm) para el pestillo, en el borde de
21⁄8” (54 mm) hole, then stop. la puerta. Perfore hasta que pueda ver
el taladro desde el agujero de 2 1⁄8 pulg.
(54 mm). Luego deténgase.
Installing the latch Instalación del pestillo

3
1. Insert the latch into the 1” (25 mm) hole 1. Inserte el pestillo en el agujero de 1 pulg.
until the face plate butts up against the (25 mm) hasta que la placa de recubrimien-
door edge. Make sure the bevel of the to toque el borde de la puerta. Asegúrese
latch bolt faces the same direction as que el lado biselado del pestillo va colocado
the door swings to close (A) (see figure en la misma dirección en que gira la puerta
3-2). para cerrarse (A) (véase la ilustración 3-2).
2. If necessary, draw a line around the latch 2. Si es necesario, dibuje una línea alrededor
face plate, then remove the latch. Use a de la placa de recubrimiento y luego quite el
pestillo. Use un cincel puntiagudo para
sharp 1” (25 mm) wood chisel to remove
madera de 1 pulg. (25 mm) y quite aproxi-
approximately 1⁄8” (3 mm) of material or
madamente 1⁄8 pulg. (3 mm) de material o lo
enough for the face plate to be perfectly suficiente como para que la placa de recu-
flush with the edge of the door (see fig- brimiento quede perfectamente al ras
ure 3-1). con el borde de la puerta (vea la ilustración
3. Insert the latch into the 1” (25 mm) hole 3-1).
in the door edge until the latch face 3. Inserte el pestillo en el agujero de 1 pulg.
plate is flush with the door edge (see (25 mm) del borde de puerta hasta que la
figure 3-2). placa de recubrimiento del pestillo quede al
Note: If using a 3⁄4” (19 mm) latch, the e
dge ras con el borde de la puerta (vea la ilus-
of the latch bore hole must be prepped to tración 3-2).
accomodate the anti-friction hinge. (The Nota: Si usa un 3⁄4” el cierre (19 milímet-
location of the anti-friction hinge depends on ros), el borde del agujero del alesaje del
the door handing). cierre se debe preparar para acomodar la
bisagra antifricción. (La localización de la
4. Secure the latch to the door with two of bisagra antifricción depende de la puerta
the 3⁄4” (19 mm) screws provided (item que da).
“j” on checklist).
4. Fije el pestillo a la puerta con dos de los
tornillos de 3⁄4 pulg. (19 mm) provistos (articu-
lo “j” en la hoja de verificación).
8
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1
⁄4” (6mm)
Perçage des trous 1” (25mm)
Suite
2. Finir de percer le trou de 21⁄8”
(54 mm) sur l’autre côté de la porte. A
3. Utiliser une scie-cloche munie d’un 1” (25mm)
foret-guide pour percer le trou de 1”
1” (25mm)
(25 mm) dans la porte. Les modèles
avec libre-accès nécessitent un trou de
1” (25 mm) supplémentaire (voir figure
2-1) (A) (procéder comme à l’étape 3). 2 1⁄4” (54mm)
4. Utiliser des forets standard pour percer 2-1
les deux trous de 1⁄4” (6 mm) en prévision
des vis de montage.
5. Percer le trou de 1” (25 mm) dans le
chant de porte en prévision du pêne.
Percer jusqu’à ce que la scie-cloche soit
visible par le trou de 21⁄8” (54 mm).
Installation du pêne
3-1
1. Insérer le pêne dans le logement de 1”

(25 mm) jusqu’à ce que la têtière
affleure le chant de porte. S’assurer
que le biseau du pêne est positionné
dans le sens de fermeture de la porte
(A) (voir figure 3-2). A
2. Si nécessaire, tracer le pourtour de la
têtière, puis retirer le pêne. À l’aide d’un
ciseau à bois pointu de 1” (25 mm)
enlever environ 1⁄8” (3 mm) de bois pour
que la têtière affleure le chant de porte
(voir figure 3-1). 3-2
3. Remettre le pêne en place dans le
logement de 1” (25 mm), puis s’assurer Anti-friction hinge
que la têtière affleure le chant de porte
(voir figure 3-2). Anti-friction device
Note: Si employant un 3⁄4” ; le verrou
(19 millimètres), le bord du trou Mortise approx.
5⁄16” (8 mm)
d’alésage de verrou doit être préparé
extra depth to
pour adapter à la charnière antifriction.
allow clearance
(L’endroit de la charnière antifriction of anti-friction
dépend de la porte remettant). hinge
4. Fixer le pêne sur la porte à l’aide des
deux vis à tête combinée de 3⁄4” (19
mm) (accessoire j de la liste de vérifica-
tion). 3-3
9
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Adjusting the lock Ajuste de la cerradura

4a 13⁄8” (35 mm) to 11⁄2” (38 mm) 13⁄8 pulg. (35 mm) a 11⁄2 pulg. (38 mm)
The L1000 Series lockset has been La cerradura Serie L1000 ha sido ensambla-
preassembled at the factory to da en fábrica para las puertas de 15⁄8 pulg.
accommodate doors 15⁄8” (41 mm) to 17⁄8” (41 mm) a 17⁄8 pulg. (48 mm) de espesor.
(48 mm) thick. Para las puertas de 13⁄8 pulg. (35 mm) a
For doors 13⁄8” (35 mm) to 11⁄2” (38 mm) 11⁄2 pulg. (38 mm) de espesor, ajuste la
thick, adjust lock as follows: (see figure cerradura de la manera siguiente (vea
4-1 & 4-2) ilustración 4-1 y 4-2):
1. Remove the back plate assembly (AA) 1. Quite la placa de montaje posterior (AA),
by removing the six back plate screws. sacando los seis tornillos que están en esa
One of the screws may be under the placa. Uno de los tornillos puede ir debajo
serial number sticker. de la etiqueta con el número de serie.
2. Remove the cylindrical drive unit (CC) 2. Saque la unidad cilíndrica (CC) de esa
from the back plate assembly (AA) by placa (AA), quitando los cuatro tornillos
removing the four Phillips head sems Phillips con arandela premontada (EE)
screws (EE) from the underside of the de la parte de adentro de la placa (AA).
back plate (AA). 3. Quite (y descarte) el espaciador (BB)
3. Remove (and discard) the spacer (BB) situado entre la placa posterior (AA) y
located between the back plate (AA) la unidad cilíndrica (CC).
and the cylindrical drive unit (CC). 4. Vuelva a montar la unidad cilíndrica
4. Remount the cylindrical drive unit (CC) (CC) sobre la placa posterior (AA), uti-
onto the back plate (AA) using the four lizando los tornillos Phillips con aran-
shorter Phillips head sems screws dela premontada, más cortos, provistos
provided (item “k” from the checklist). (artículo “k” en la hoja de verificación).
5. Remove the cross pin from position B 5. Quite el pasador transversal de la posi-
on the drive shaft (DD). ción B del eje (DD).
6. Reposition the cross pin in position C 6. Vuelva a instalar el pasador transversal
on the drive shaft (DD). en la posición C del eje (DD).
7. Reinstall the back plate assembly (AA) 7. Vuelva a instalar la placa de montaje
onto the front lock housing. posterior (AA) en la caja delantera de
la cerradura.

4b 2” (51 mm) to 21⁄4” (57 mm) 2 pulg. (51 mm) a 21⁄4 pulg. (57 mm)
For doors 2” (51 mm) to 21⁄4” (57 mm) Para las puertas de 2 pulg. (51 mm) a
thick, adjust the lock as follows: (see fig- 21⁄4 pulg. (57 mm) de espesor, ajuste la
ures 4-3 & 4-4) cerradura de la manera siguiente (vea las
1. Remove the back plate assembly (AA) ilustraciones 4-3 y 4-4):
by removing the six back plate screws. 1. Quite la placa de montaje posterior
One of the screws may be under the (AA), sacando los seis tornillos. Uno de
serial number sticker. los tornillos puede ir debajo de la eti-
2. Remove the cylindrical drive unit (CC) queta con el número de serie.
from the back plate assembly (AA) by 2. Saque la unidad cilíndrica (CC) de esa
removing the four Phillips head sems placa (AA), quitándole los cuatro tornil-
screws (EE) from the underside of the los Phillips con arandela premontada
back plate (AA). (EE) de la parte de adentro de la placa
(AA).
10
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Ajustement de la serrure
13⁄8” (35 mm) à 11⁄2” (38 mm)
(AA)
La serrure de la série L1000 a été (EE)
préassemblée à l’usine pour s’adapter à
des portes de 15⁄8” (41 mm) à 17⁄8” (48 mm)
d’épaisseur. (BB)
Pour portes de 13⁄8” (35 mm) à 11⁄2” (38
mm) d’épaisseur, ajuster la serrure
comme suit (voir figure 4-1 et 4-2) :
1. Enlever le palastre (AA) en desserrant (CC) (DD)
les six vis. Un de ses vis peut se trou- 4-1
ver sous l’étiquette du numéro de série.
2. Enlever l’unité cylindrique d’entraîne-
ment (CC) en desserrant les quatre vis
«sem» à rondelle captive (EE) sur
l’intérieur du palastre (AA).
3. Enlever (et jeter) l’entretoise (BB)
située entre le palastre (AA) et l’unité
cylindrique d’entraînement (CC). (CC)
4. Replacer l’unité cylindrique d’entraîne-
ment (CC) sur le palastre (AA) à l’aide
des vis «sem» à rondelle captive
(accessoire k de la liste de vérification).
5. Retirer la contre-goupille de la position (AA)
B de l’arbre d’entraînement (DD). 4-2
6. Replacer cettre contre-goupille dans la

position C de l’arbre d’entraînement (DD).
7. Fixer le palastre (AA) sur le boîtier de
la serrure.
2” (51 mm) à 21⁄4” (57 mm)
Pour les portes de 2” (51 mm) à 21⁄4”

(57 mm) d’épaisseur, ajuster la serrure
comme suit : (voir figures 4-3 et 4-4).
1. Enlever le palastre (AA) en desserrant
les six vis. L’une de ces vis peut se
trouver sur l’étiquette du numéro de
série.
2. Enlever l’unité cylindrique d’entraîne-
ment (CC) en desserrant les quatre vis
«sem» (EE) sur l’intérieur du palastre
(AA).
11
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED

4b 2” (51 mm) to 21⁄4” (57 mm) 2 pulg. (51 mm) a 21⁄4 pulg. (57 mm)
Continued Continuación
3. Insert the extra spacer provided in the 3. Inserte el espaciador adicional, que viene
accessory pack (item “f” on the con el juego de accesorios (artículo “f” en
checklist) between the cylindrical la hoja de verificación), entre la unidad
drive unit (CC) and the back plate. cilíndrica (CC).
4. Remount the cylindrical drive unit (CC) 4. Vuelva a montar la unidad cilíndrica
onto the back plate (AA) using the four (CC) sobre la placa posterior (AA), uti-
8-32 x 11⁄16” (17 mm) screws provided lizando los cuatro tornillos de 8-32x11⁄16
(item “l” on checklist). pulg. (17 mm), provistos (artículo “l” en
5. Add a cross pin (item “h” on the la hoja de verificación).
checklist) in position A on the drive 5. Añada un pasador transversal (artículo
shaft (DD) (see figure 4-3). “h” en la hoja de verificación) en la
6. Remount the back plate assembly (AA) posición A del eje (DD) (véase la
onto the front lock housing. ilustración 4-3).
Warning: Damage may result to the lock- 6. Vuelva a instalar la placa de montaje
set if the lever hits against either a wall or posterior (AA) en la caja delantera de la
a wall stop. In such a case, ALL war- cerradura cubierta.
ranties will be null and void. Advertencia: si la manija golpea contra la
pared o el tope de la puerta, puede dañarse.
Failure to set the lock up properly En tal caso, quedarán anuladas TODAS las
when adjusting door thickness can garantías.
damage the lock. In such case, all war-
La falta de instalar la cerradura correcta-
ranties will be null and void.
mente al ajustar grueso de la puerta puede
dañar la cerradura. En tal caso, todas las
garantías serán nulas y sin efecto.
Installing the lock Instalación de la cerradura

5
1. If not removed already, remove the 1. Quite la manija que va en la parte de

inside lever by depressing the spring adentro de la puerta, apretando la
loaded retaining clip visible through the abrazadera sujetadora de resorte que
poke hole on the cylindrical drive unit. se ve a través del agujero.
2. Pull the lever while simultaneously 2. Tire la manija mientras suelta la
releasing the retaining clip. abrazadera sujetadora.
3. Remove the lever from the lock body. 3. Saque la manija del cuerpo de
4. Align the latch tail piece (A) with the cerradura.
shoe retractor (B) of the cylindrical 4. Alinee la parte posterior del pestillo (A)
drive unit (D) by depressing the latch retractor del patín (B) de la unidad
bolt slightly. Make sure that the latch cilíndrica (D), apretando ligeramente el
prongs (C) and cylindrical drive unit (D) pestillo. Asegúrese que las salientes del
engage each other as shown in figure pestillo (C) y la unidad cilíndrica (D) se
5-1. enganchan como muestra la ilustración
5-1.
12
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
2” (51 mm) à 21⁄4” (57 mm)
Suite
(f)
3. Insérer l’entretoise supplémentaire
(accessoire f de la liste de vérification)
(CC)
entre l’unité cylindrique d’entraînement
(CC).
4. Fixer l’unité cylindrique d’entraînement
(CC) sur le palastre (AA) (accessoire l
de la liste de vérification) en serrant les (AA)
quatre vis de 11⁄16” (17 mm) . 4-3
5. Ajouter la contre-goupille supplémen-
taire (accessoire h de la liste de
vérification) dans la position A de l’arbre
d’entraînement (DD) (voir figure 4-3).
6. Fixer le palastre (AA) sur le boîtier de (AA)
la serrure logement.
Attention : Tout dommage résultant d’un
coup de béquille contre le mur ou le butoir (EE)
mural annulerait TOUTES les garanties. (BB)
Le manque d’établir la serrure correcte-
ment en ajustant l’épaisseur de porte
peut endommager la serrure. Dans un
tel cas, toutes les garanties seront (CC) (DD)
nulles et.
4-4
Installation de la serrure
C
1. Si ce n’est déjà fait, enlever la béquille
intérieure en appuyant sur l’anneau A
B
d’arrêt à ressort visible par le petit ori-
fice de l’unité cylindrique.
2. Tirer la béquille tout en faisant relâcher C
l’anneau d’arrêt à ressort.
3. Retirer la béquille du corps de la D
serrure.
5-1
4. Aligner la tige de connexion du pêne
(A) avec le rétracteur du sabot (B) de
l’unité cylindrique (D) en appuyant
légèrement sur le pêne demi-tour.
S’assurer que les mentonnets (C) du
pêne et l’unité cylindrique (D) d’en-
traînement s’engagent correctement
(voir figure 5-1).
13
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Testing the operation of the lock Pruebas de funcionamiento de la cerradura

6
1. Enter the factory-set combination: 1. Ponga la combinación que viene de

Depress buttons 2 and 4 at the same fábrica: oprima los botones 2 y 4 al
time (release), then press button 3 mismo tiempo (suelte); luego oprima el
(release). You should feel a slight click botón 3 (suelte). Con cada uno de los
as each button is depressed. (see figure botones que apriete, deberá oir un
6-1) chasquido (véase la ilustración 6-1).
2. Turn the outside lever to the stop 2. Mueva la manija hasta la posición tope
position and hold. Make sure the latch y manténgala en esa posición.
is fully retracted and flush with the latch Asegúrese de que el pestillo queda
face plate. totalmente replegado.
3. Release the lever. The latch should 3. Suelte la manija. El pestillo debería
return to the fully extended position. volver a salir completamente.
4. Turn the inside drive sleeve (A) to the 4. Haga girar el eje interior del impulsor
stop position and hold (see figure (A) hasta donde se pare y manténgalo
6-2). The latch will retract until it is flush en esa posición (véase la ilustración 6-
with the face plate. Release the sleeve 2). El pestillo se replegará hasta
— the latch should return to the fully quedar al ras con la placa de recubrim-
extended position. iento. Suelte el eje y el pestillo debería
volver a salir
completamente.
Installing the reinforcing plate Instalación de la placa de refuerzo

7
1. Place the reinforcing plate (A) over 1. Coloque la placa de refuerzo sobre el
the inside drive sleeve (B) as shown in eje interior del impulsor (B), como lo
figure 7-1. muestra la ilustración 7-1.
2. Insert the two 21⁄2” (64 mm) screws (C) 2. Inserte los dos tornillos de 21⁄2 pulg. (64
(item “m” on checklist) through the mm) (C) (artículo “m” en la hoja de
reinforcing plate into the 1⁄4” (6 mm) verificación) a través de la placa de
holes drilled in the door. refuerzo, en los agujeros de 1⁄4 pulg. (6
3. Tighten the screws to secure the lock mm) que se hicieron en la puerta.
housing to the door. The reinforcing 3. Apriete los tornillos para fijar la caja de
plate (A) should be parallel with the la cerradura a la puerta. La placa de
edge of the door and centered around refuerzo (A) debería quedar paralela al
the inside drive sleeve (B). borde de la puerta y centrada alrededor
Note: Using the thread ring to center the del interior del eje de impulsión (B).
reinforcing plate (A) will also aid when Nota: un aro roscado para centrar la
installing the inside trim plate in step 9 placa de refuerzo (A) también ayudará a
page 16. instalar la placa interior, descrita en el
paso 9 de la página 16.
14
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Vérification du fonctionnement de
la serrure
1. Entrer la combinaison préréglée à

l’usine: appuyer sur le 2 et le 4 ensem-
ble, puis relâcher. Appuyer sur le 3,
puis relâcher. Vous devriez sentir un
léger déclic chaque fois que vous
pressez un bouton (voir figure 6-1).
2. Tourner la béquille jusqu’en fin de
course et la maintenir. Vérifier que le 6-1
pêne est complètement rétracté et
affleure la têtière.
3. Relâcher la béquille. Le pêne devrait
reprendre sa position initiale d’exten-
sion.
4. Faire pivoter le manchon d’entraîne-
ment (A) jusqu’en fin de course (voir
figure 6-2). Le pêne se rétracte pour
affleurer la têtière. Relâcher le man-
chon : le pêne devrait reprendre sa
position initiale d’extension.
A
6-2
Installation de la plaque de renfort A
1. Placer la plaque de renfort (A) sur le

manchon d’entraînement (B) (voir
figure 7-1).
2. Insérer les deux vis de 21⁄2” (64 mm) (C) C
(article M de la liste de vérification)
dans les trous de 1⁄4” (6 mm).
3. Serrer les vis pour fixer le boîtier de B
serrure à la porte. La plaque de renfort
(A) doit être parallèle au chant de porte 7-1
et centrée autour du manchon intérieur
(B).
Note : La bague filetée est également utile
pour centrer la plaque de renfort (A) lors
de l’installation de la plaque de garniture
intérieure (étape 9, page 17).
15
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installing the passage set Instalación del dispositivo

8 models 103x, 104x modelos 103x, 104x
1. Insert the key or turn knob passage set 1. Inserte la llave o el cilindro de paso
assembly (A) into the lower opening in libre (A) en la más bajo abertura de la
the trim plate (C) and secure it with the placa interior (C) y fíjelo desde adentro
spring clip (B) from inside (see figure 8- con la abrazadera sujetadora (B)
1). (véase la ilustración 8-1).
2. The tailpiece (D) is scored in several 2. La parte posterior (D) tiene varias rayas
places so you can easily break off the que pueden romperse para obtener la
section that extends beyond the longitud necesaria para que el dispositi-
required length to engage the passage vo de paso libre se enganche a la leva.
set cam. 3. Con un par de pinzas sostenga bien la
3. Hold the tailpiece (D) firmly with a pair parte posterior (D) del lado del cilindro,
of pliers on the passage plug side of the cerca de la línea donde desea cortarla.
tailpiece, adjacent to the desired break 4. Con otras pinzas, tome la parte posteri-
line. or del lado de las líneas marcadas y
4. With a second pair of pliers, grip the haga un movimiento hacia arriba y hacia
tailpiece on the other side of the scored abajo hasta que se corte (véase la ilus-
line and bend up and down until it tración 8-2).
breaks (see figure 8-2)
Installing the inside trim plate Instalación de la placa interior

9
1. Position the trim plate (A) over the 1. Coloque la placa interior (A) sobre la
reinforcing plate (B) (see figure 9-1). placa de refuerzo (B) (véase la ilus-
For passage models, assure the tail- tración 9-1).
piece is aligned with the passage actu- Para los modelos del paso, asegure la
ator slot, and the two engage properly. cola se alinea con la ranura del actu-
2. Gently screw the thread ring clockwise ador del paso, y los dos enganchan
(C) onto the cylindrical drive unit (D). correctamente.
If you encounter difficulty during Step 2, 2. Suavemente atornille hacia la derecha
remove the trim plate and readjust the el aro roscado (C) en la unidad cilíndrica
reinforcing plate. Do not force the (D).
thread ring. Si tiene dificultad para ejecutar el paso
3. Tighten the thread ring clockwise (C) 2, quite la placa interior y reajuste la
using the spanner wrench provided (E) placa de refuerzo. No fuerce el aro
(item “i” on checklist). (see figure 9-2) roscado.
3. Apriete hacia la derecha el aro roscado
(C) utilizando la llave de arco provista
(E) (artículo “i” en la hoja de verifi-
cación). Vea la ilustración 9-2.
16
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installation du libre-accès
modèles 103x, 104x C
1. Insérer la clé ou le cylindre du libre- D

accès (A) dans inférieur l’ouverture de
la plaque de garniture (C) et maintenir
en place à l’aide de l’agrafe (B) (voir
figure 8-1).
2. La tige de connexion (D) comporte B
plusieurs points de brisure pour
A
permettre de la casser après la 8-1
longueur requise pour engager la came
du mécanisme de libre-accès.
3. Avec une paire de pinces, maintenir
fermement la tige de connexion (D)
côté cylindre, près du point de brisure
souhaité. D
4. Avec une deuxième paire de pinces,
maintenir la tige de connexion de
l’autre côté du point de brisure et la
faire plier de haut en bas jusqu’à ce
qu’elle casse (voir figure 8-2).
Installation de la plaque de garniture 8-2
B A
1. Placer la plaque de garniture (A) sur la

plaque de renfort (B) (voir figure 9-1).
C
Pour des modèles de passage, assurez
la queue est aligné avec la fente de
déclencheur de passage, et les deux
s’engagent correctement.
2. Visser doucement la bague filetée dans
le sens des aiguilles d’une montre (C)
sur l’unité cylindrique d’entraînement D
(D). 9-1
En cas de difficulté, enlever la plaque
de garniture et réaligner la plaque de
renfort. Ne pas forcer la bague filetée. E
3. Serrer la bague filetée dans le sens
des aiguilles d’une montre (C) à l’aide
de la clé à ergot (E) (accessoire i de la
liste de vérification) (voir figure 9-2).
9-2
17
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installing the inside lever Instalación de la manija del lado de aden-

10 tro
1. Place the lever (A) on the inside drive 1. Coloque la manija (A) en el eje interior del
sleeve. Locate the retaining clip through impulsor. Encuentre la abrazadera
the poke hole in the collar (C) of the sujetadora a través del agujero en el cuel-
inside drive sleeve (B). If the thread ring lo (C) del eje de impulsión (B). Si el aro
covers this poke hole, loosen the thread roscado cubre el agujero, afloje el aro (D)
ring (D) and align the hole in the thread y alinee el agujero del aro con el del cuel-
ring with the hole in the collar (C). lo (C).
2. Depress the retaining clip using the 2. Presione la abrazadera sujetadora,
pointed tip of the spanner wrench utilizando la punta de la llave de arco
(E) (see figure 10-1). (E) (véase la ilustración 10-1).
3. Push the inside lever (A) on while simul- 3. Introduzca la manija (A) mientras quita
taneously removing the spanner wrench la llave de arco (E) - la abrazadera
(E) – the retaining clip will snap back sujetadora volverá a colocarse en su
into place, thereby securing the lever. lugar.
4. Retighten the thread ring (D) if it was 4. Vuelva a apretar el aro roscado (D), si
loosened. se aflojó.
5. Turn the inside lever to the stop position 5. Mueva la manija del lado de adentro
and hold. The latch should retract hasta la posición tope y manténgala en
smoothly until it is flush with the face esa posición. El pestillo debería reple-
plate. garse suavemente hasta quedar al ras
6. Release the lever – the latch should con la placa de recubrimiento.
return to the fully extended position. 6. Suelte la manija - el pestillo debería
volver a salir completamente.
Installing the combination change Instalación del cilindro para cambiar la

11 plug assembly combinación
1. Insert the DF-59 key (A) into the cylinder 1. Inserte la llave DF-59 (A) en el cilindro
(B) of the combination change plug para cambiar la combinación (B) (vea la
assembly. (see figure 11-1) ilustración 11-1).
2. Insert the threaded bolt (C) through the 2. Inserte el perno roscado (C) a través del
hole in the trim plate and into the agujero en la placa interior hasta el
mounting stud located in the 1” (25 mm) saliente de montaje situado en el agu-
diameter cutout (see figure 11-1). jero de 1 pulg. (25 mm) de diámetro
No retainer clip is required. (véase la ilustración 11-1). No se
3. Turn the key clockwise until the collar of requiere abrazadera sujetadora.
the combination change plug assembly 3. Haga girar la llave hacia la derecha
butts up to the trim plate. Caution: Do hasta que el cuello del cilindro para
not overtighten. cambiar la combinación quede al ras
The key can be removed in either the con la placa de adorno. Precaución: no
vertical or horizontal position. apriete demasiado.
La llave puede sacarse en la posición
vertical u horizontal.
18
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installation de la béquille intérieure D C

E
1. Placer la béquille (A) sur le manchon

d’entraînement intérieur. Localiser
l’anneau d’arrêt dans le petit orifice du
collet (C) du manchon intérieur (B). Si la
bague filetée recouvre l’orifice, desserrer
la bague (D), puis aligner l’orifice de la B A
bague avec celui du collet (C).
2. À l’aide de la pointe de la clé à ergot (E), 10-1
desserez l’anneau d’arrêt (voir figure 10-
1).
3. Faire glisser la béquille intérieure (A) en
retirant la clé à ergot (E) : l’anneau
d’arrêt reprend sa position initiale et
maintient la béquille.
4. Resserrer la bague filetée (D) si néces-
saire.
5. Abaisser la béquille intérieure jusqu’en
fin de course et la maintenir dans cette
position. Le pêne devrait se rétracter
doucement et affleurer la têtière.
6. Relâcher la béquille : le pêne devrait
reprendre sa position initiale d’extension.
Installation du cylindre de changement de C

combinaison
1. Insérer la clé DF-59 (A) dans le cylindre

(B) de changement de combinaison (voir
figure 11-1).
2. Insérer le boulon fileté (C) dans le trou A
de la plaque de garniture et dans le
goujon situé dans le logement de 1” (25 B
mm) de diamètre (voir figure 11-1).
Aucun anneau d’arrêt requis. 11-1
3. Tourner la clé dans le sens des aiguilles
d’une montre jusqu’à ce que le collet du
cylindre vienne affleurer la plaque de
garniture. Attention : ne pas trop serrer.
La clé peut se retirer en position verti-
cale ou horizontale.
19
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
KABA SIMPLEX® L1000 SERIES
LIMITED WARRANTY
Kaba Access Control warrants this product to be free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three (3) years.
Kaba Access Control will repair or replace, at our discretion, L1000 Series Locks
found by Kaba Access Control analysis to be defective during this period. Our
only liability, whether in tort or in contract, under this warranty is to repair or
replace products that are returned to Kaba Access Control within the three (3)
year warranty period.
This warranty is in lieu of and not in addition to any other warranty or condi-
tion, express or implied, including without limitation merchantability, fitness for
purpose or absence of latent defects.
ATTENTION: This warranty does not cover problems arising out of improper
installation, neglect or misuse. All warranties implied or written will be null and
void if the lock is not installed properly and/or if any supplied component part
is substituted with a foreign part. If the lock is used with a wall bumper, the
warranty is null and void. If a doorstop is required, we recommend the use of a
floor secured stop.
The environment and conditions of use determine the life of finishes on Kaba
Access Control products. Finishes on Kaba Access Control products are subject
to change due to wear and environmental corrosion. Kaba Access Control can-
not be held responsible for the deterioration of finishes.
Authorization to Return Goods
Returned merchandise will not be accepted without prior approval. Approvals
and Returned Goods Authorization Numbers (RGA Numbers) for the L1000
Series are available through our Customer Service department in Winston-
Salem, NC 800.849.8324. The serial number of a lock is required to obtain
this RGA Number. The issuance of an RGA does not imply that a credit or
replacement will be issued.
The RGA number must be included on the address label when material is
returned to the factory. All component parts including latches and strikes (even
if not inoperative) must be included in the package with return. All merchandise
must be returned prepaid and properly packaged to the address indicated.
20
UNCLASSIFIED
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 1563 WINSTON SALEM NC
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
KABA ACCESS & DATA SYSTEMS AMERICAS

2941 INDIANA AVE
WINSTON-SALEM, NC 27199-3770
REGISTRATION CARD This lock will be used in what type of facility?
Thank you for purchasing our product. In order to o Commercial Building o Industrial/Manufacturing o Airport
protect your investment and to enable us to better o College / University o Government / Military o School / Educational
serve you in the future, please fill out this registration o Hospital / Healthcare o Other (please specify)
card and return it to Kaba Access Control, or
register online at www.kabaaccess.com. What area is being secured with this lock? (e.g. Front Door, Common Door, Exercise Room)
Name This lock is:
o New Installation
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Position
o Replacing a conventional keyed lock
Company o Replacing a Kaba Mechanical Pushbutton Lock
Address o Replacing a Kaba Electronic Access Control
City
o Replacing a Keyless Lock other than Kaba
How did you learn about Kaba Access Control Pushbutton Locks?
State ZIP (Postal Code) Country
o Advertisement o Previous Use o Internet/Web o Another Use
Phone
o Locksmith o Maintenance o Training Class o Other (please specify)
Email
What was your reason for buying this lock?
Name of Dealer Purchased From
Date of Purchase Who installed your lock?
Lock Model Number
o Locksmith o Maintenance o Other
o Check here if you would like more information on Kaba Access Control locks.
UNCLASSIFIED
Notes
21
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installing the strike Instalación de la contra

12
1. Mark the location of the strike on the 1. Marque en el marco de la puerta el lugar
door frame (A) according to the tem- donde va la contra (A), siguiendo las indi-
plate. Make certain that the line through caciones de la plantilla. Asegúrese que la
the screw holes of the strike is aligned línea que atraviesa los agujeros de los
with the line through the screw holes on tornillos de la contra está alineada con la
the face of the latch when the door is línea que atraviesa los agujeros de los
closed (see figure 12-1). tornillos de la chapa del pestillo, cuando
2. Mortise the door frame (for strike box) to la puerta está cerrada (véase la ilus-
a minimum depth of 3⁄4” (19 mm). This tración 12-1).
will guarantee that the latch (D) can be 2. Corte el marco de puerta (para empotrar
fully extended into the door frame when la caja guardapolvo) hasta una profundi-
using a 3⁄4” throw latch (The supplied dad mínima de 3⁄4 pulg. (19 mm). Esto
KABA strike box must be used.) garantizará que el pestillo (D) entre com-
3. Place the strike box (B) in the mortised pletamente en el marco de la puerta,
cutout. Secure the strike plate (C) with cuando se utiliza un pestillo con
two of the 3⁄4” (19 mm) screws (E) provid- proyección de 3⁄4 pulg. (Deberá utilizarse la
ed (item “j” on checklist). If necessary, caja guardapolvo suministrada por KABA).
draw a line around the strike. Use this 3. Coloque la caja guardapolvo (B) en el
line as a guide to cut out a minimum of corte que ha hecho para empotrarla.
1
⁄16” (2 mm) of material or enough to Fije la contra (C) con dos de los tornil-
make the strike plate flush with the door los de 3⁄4 pulg. (19 mm) (E) provistos
frame. (artículo “j” en la hoja de verificación).
Caution: Check the operation of the latch Si es necesario, dibuje el contorno de
by making sure that the deadlatch stops la contra. Use esta línea como guía
against the strike plate, and does not slip para cortar un mínimo de 1⁄16 pulg. (2
into the strike opening when the door is mm) de material o lo suficiente para
closed (A) (see figure 12-2). If this situation que la hembra quede al ras con el
occurs, then a total lockout may result. This marco de la puerta.
will void our warranty of the complete lock Precaución: verifique, al quedar la puerta
mechanism. cerrada (A), el funcionamiento del pestillo
Note: If there is a gap between the edge of asegurándose que el pin de seguridad
the door and the frame (or in the case of quede detenido por la placa de la contra y
double doors, the edge of the door and the no entre en la abertura de la misma
edge of the door) of more than 1⁄4” (6 mm) (véase la ilustración 12-2). Si se produce
the deadlatch will fail to engage the strike esta situación, es posible que la puerta se
jamb. cierre completamente y no pueda abrirse.
En ese caso la garantía de todo el mecan-
If necessary, correct the door over-travel by ismo de la cerradura quedará anulada.
using the rubber bumpers as decribed in
Preserving the latch. Nota: si hay un espacio de más de 1⁄4 pulg.
(6 mm) entre el borde y el marco de la
puerta (o en el caso de puertas dobles, el
borde de una puerta y el borde de la otra)
el pin de seguridad no logrará enganchar el
batiente donde va la hembra.
Si es necesario, corrija el exceso de
batiente de la puerta mediante los topes
de caucho, tal como se describe en
Mantenimiento del pestillo.
22
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installation de la gâche
B
1. Marquer l’emplacement de la gâche sur

le jambage (A) de la porte à l’aide du E
gabarit. S’assurer, lorsque la porte est
fermée, que la ligne de repère des trous
pour les vis de la têtière est alignée
avec l’axe des trous de l’avant du pêne
(voir figure 12-1). A
2. Pratiquer une mortaise dans le jambage C
(en prévision du boîtier antipoussière)
de 3⁄4” (19 mm) de profondeur maximum.
Ceci permettra au pêne (D) de s’en- D
gager complètement dans son logement
dans le cas d’un pêne à projection de
3
⁄4”. (Utiliser le boîtier antipoussière 12-1
KABA fourni).
3. Placer le boîtier antipoussière (B) dans
son logement mortaisé. Fixer la gâche
(C) à l’aide des deux vis (E) de 3⁄4” (19
mm) (accessoire j de la liste de vérifica-
tion). Tracer le pourtour de la gâche si
nécessaire. Utiliser cette ligne de repère
pour enlever environ 1⁄16” (2 mm) de bois CORRECT
afin que la têtière affleure le jambage de
la porte.
Attention : Vérifier que le contre-pêne de
sécurité vient s’appuyer contre la gâche. Si
le contre-pêne glisse dans le logement de
la gâche lorsque la porte est fermée (A)
(voir figure 12-2), la serrure pourrait inter- INCORRECT
dire l’accès. Une mauvaise installation
annule toute garantie du mécanisme de
verrouillage. A
Note: S’il y a un espace de plus de 1⁄4” (6
12-2
mm) entre le chant de porte et le jambage
(ou entre la cloison s’il s’agit d’une porte à
deux vantaux), le pêne ne pourra pas s’en-
gager dans son logement.
Le cas échéant, corriger l’excès de fin de
course de la porte en fixant des butées de
caoutchouc comme que décrit au chapitre
Alignement entre la porte et le jambage.
23
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installing the key override cylinder Instalación del cilindro dominante de la

13
invalidación
This step is very important, as it will Este paso es muy importante, pues
keep the lock from being inadvertently guardará la cerradura inadvertidamente
forced out of timing. de ser forzado fuera de la sin-
1. Locate the drive pins/actuators found in cronización.
the key override slot of the outside 1. Localice los pernos de impulsión/los
lever. actuadores encontrados en la ranura
Note: These vary depending on the key dominante de la invalidación de la
override selected. For Best, Corbin, or palanca exterior.
Sargent, use figure 13-1, for Schlage, use Nota: Éstos varían dependiendo de la
figure 13-2, and for Medeco/ASSA/Yale invalidación de llave seleccionada. Para
use figure 13-3. el mejor, Corbin, o Sargent, utiliza el
2. Notice the rear of the cylinder that will cuadro 13-1, para Schlage, el cuadro 13-2
be installed. The profile and receiver del uso, y para el cuadro 13-3 del uso de
area on the rear of that cylinder should Medeco/ASSA/Yale.
be able to receive the pins/actuators 2. Note la parte posterior del cilindro que
found inside the lever. será instalado. El perfil y el área del
3. The drive pins/actuators must be receptor en la parte posterior de ese
aligned to easily receive the cylinder cilindro deben poder recibir los
when installed. The lever does not pernos/los actuadores encontrados den-
need to be turned partially or otherwise tro de la palanca.
to insert the cylinder. If this is done, it 3. Les clavettes/déclencheurs doivent être
will cause the drive shaft to be turned alignés pour recevoir facilement le cylin-
and the timing will be off. dre une fois installés. Le levier n’a pas
4. If the drive pins/actuators will not align, besoin d’être tourné partiellement ou d’in-
use a flat black screwdriver or needle sérer autrement le cylindre. Si ceci est
nose pliers to turn the pins/actuator fait, il causera l’arbre d’entraînement
approximately 180o. Then repeat Step 3. d’être tourné et la synchronisation sera
éteinte.
5. Once the cylinder is inserted and
locked into place, rotate the key and 4. Si los pernos de impulsión/los actu-
the latch should retract flush. If so, adores no alinean, utilice un destornil-
release and remove the key. If not, lador del negro plano o los alicates de
repeat Step 4. nariz de aguja para dar vuelta a los per-
nos/actuador aproximadamente 180o.
6. Turn the outside lever. The latch should Entonces repita el paso 3.
not move. If it does, the timing is off.
Remove the cylinder and repeat Step 4. 5. Una vez que el cilindro se inserta y se
traba en lugar, gire la llave y el cierre
7. Enter the combination, assuring it debe contraer a ras. Si es así lance y
works as intended. The latch should quite la llave. Si no, repita el paso 4.
retract flush.
6. Dé vuelta a la palanca exterior. El
cierre no debe moverse. Si hace, la
sincronización está apagada. Quite el
cilindro y repita el paso 4.
7. Incorpore la combinación, asegurándolo
que trabaja según lo previsto. El cierre
debe contraer a ras.
24
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Installation du cylindre principal de Driver

priorité
Cette étape est très importante, car elle
gardera la serrure d’être par distraction
forcé hors de la synchronisation.
1. Placez à clef les clavettes/déclencheurs
trouvés dans la fente principale de prior-
ité de levier extérieur. Cylinder
Note: Ceux-ci varient selon le dépasse-
ment du clef choisi. Pour le meilleur,
Corbin, ou Sargent, emploient le schéma 13-1
13-1, pour Schlage, schéma 13-2 d’utilisa-
tion, et pour le schéma 13-3 d’utilisation de Driver
Medeco/ASSA/Yale.
2. Notez l’arrière du cylindre qui sera instal-
lé. Le profil et le secteur de récepteur sur
l’arrière de ce cylindre devraient pouvoir
recevoir les goupilles/déclencheurs trou-
vés à l’intérieur du levier.
3 Les clavettes/déclencheurs doivent être
alignés pour recevoir facilement le
cylindre une fois installés. Le levier n’a Cylinder
pas besoin d’être tourné partiellement
ou d’insérer autrement le cylindre. Si
ceci est fait, il causera l’arbre d’en- 13-2
traînement d’être tourné et la synchro-
nisation sera éteinte.
4 Si les clavettes/déclencheurs Driver
n’aligneront pas, utilisez un tournevis
de noir plat ou les pinces de nez
d’aiguille pour tourner les
goupilles/déclencheur approximative-
ment 180o. Répétez alors l’étape 3.
5. Une fois que le cylindre est inséré et
fermé à clef sur l’endroit, tournez la clef et
le verrou devrait se rétracter à affleure- Cylinder
ment. Si oui, libérez et enlevez la clef.
Sinon, répétez l’étape 4. 13-3
6. Tournez le levier extérieur. Le verrou ne
devrait pas se déplacer. S’il fait, la syn-
chronisation est éteinte. Enlevez le cylin-
dre et répétez l’étape 4.
7. Écrivez la combinaison, l’assurant que
travaille comme prévu. Le verrou
devrait se rétracter à affleurement.
25
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Changing the combination Cambio de la combinación

14
FOR YOUR SECURITY THE PARA SU SEGURIDAD CAMBIE LA

COMBINATION MUST BE CHANGED COMBINACIÓN DESPUÉS DE
WHEN THE LOCK IS INSTALLED. INSTALAR LA CERRADURA.
The door must be open. La puerta debe estar abierta.
On models with the passage feature, En los modelos con paso libre, asegúrese
make sure the passage feature is disen- que el dispositivo para paso libre está
gaged: turn knob or key should be in verti- desactivado o que la llave está en posi-
cal position (A). ción vertical (A).
1. Insert the DF-59 (B) control key into the 1. Inserte la llave de control DF-59 (B) en
combination change plug assembly (C) el cilindro para cambiar la combinación
and unscrew the cylinder by turning the (C) y desatornille el cilindro, haciendo
key counterclockwise. Remove the girar la llave hacia la izquierda. Quite el
combination change plug to gain cilindro para tener acceso al eje de
access to the combination change cambio de combinación (véase la ilus-
sleeve (see figure 14-1). tración 14-1).
2. Turn the outside lever once to the stop 2. Mueva una vez la manija que va del lado
position then release. The latch should de afuera hasta la posición. El pestillo no
not retract (see figure 14-2). debe retraerse (ver la figura 14-2).
3. Enter the existing combination. On new 3. Ponga la combinación de fábrica. En las
installations, use the factory-set instalaciones nuevas, utilice la combi-
combination: depress 2 and 4 simulta- nación de fábrica: oprima los botones 2 y
neously, (release), then 3 (release). You 4 simultáneamente, (suelte), luego opri-
should feel a slight click as each button ma el 3 (suelte). Cada vez que oprime
is depressed. un botón, debería oir un chasquido.
4. Insert the spanner wrench as shown in 4. Inserte la llave de arco, como se indica
figure 14-3 to engage the combination en la ilustración 14-3, para enganchar el
change sleeve (A). Gently turn the eje de cambio de combinación (A).
spanner wrench clockwise to the stop Suave-mente, haga girar la llave de arco
position (a slight click should be felt), hacia la derecha hasta que se detenga
then turn the spanner wrench (se debería oir un leve chasquido); luego
counterclockwise to the stop position gire la llave de arco hacia la izquierda
(A) (see figure 14-4). Remove the hasta que se detenga (A) (véase la ilus-
spanner wrench. tración 14-4). Saque la llave de arco.
5. Turn the outside lever once to the stop 5. Mueva la manija que va del lado de
position then release. The latch should afuera hasta la posición. El pestillo no
not retract (see figure 14-2). debe retraerse (ver la figura 14-2)
6. Choose your new combination, write 6. Escoja una combinación nueva,
it on page 24, then enter the new escríbala en la página 24 y luego
combination — depress buttons ponga la nueva combinación — oprima
carefully (a slight click should be felt as los botones cuidadosamente (al oprimir
each button is depressed). cada uno de los botones, se debería
Note: You can use one button or all five sentir un leve chasquido).
for a combination, but each button can Nota: para crear una combinación, usted
only be used once. You can depress two puede usar un solo botón o los cinco,
or more buttons simultaneously as a step pero cada uno de ellos puede usarse una
in the combination. At least 3 digits are sola vez. Para su combinación puede
recommended in the code. oprimir dos o más botones simultánea-
mente. Por lo menos 3 dígitos se
recomiendan en el código.
26
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Changement de la combinaison B
POUR VOTRE SÉCURITÉ, CHANGER C

LA COMBINAISON AU MOMENT D’IN-
STALLER LA SERRURE
Garder la porte ouverte.
A
Sur les modèles pourvus de la fonction de
libre-accès, s’assurer que cette fonction A
est désactivée. Le bouton ou la clé devrait
être à la verticale (A).
14-1
1. Insérer la clé de commande DF-59 (B)
dans le cylindre de changement de
combinaison (C) et desserrer le cylindre
en tournant la clé dans le sens inverse
des aiguilles d’une montre. Retirer le
cylindre de changement de combinaison
afin d’atteindre le manchon de change-
ment de combinaison (voir figure 14-1).
2. Abaisser la béquille extérieure jusqu’en fin
de course, puis la relâcher. Le pêne ne
doit pas se rétracter (voir la figure 14-2).
3. Entrer la combinaison existante. Sur les
nouveaux modèles, entrer la combinai-
son préréglée à l’usine : appuyer sur le 14-2
2 et le 4 ensemble, puis relâcher.
Appuyer sur le 3, puis relâcher. Un A
léger déclic doit se faire sentir chaque
fois qu’un bouton est pressé.
4. Insérer la clé à ergot comme indiqué
sur la figure 14-3 pour engager le man-
chon du cylindre de changement de
combinaison (A). Tourner avec précau-
tion la clé à ergot dans le sens des
aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’en fin de
course (un léger déclic doit se faire
sentir), puis tourner dans le sens
inverse jusqu’en fin de course (A) (voir
figure 14-4). Retirer la clé à ergot. 14-3
5. Abaisser la béquille extérieure jusqu’en
fin de course puis la relâcher. Le pêne ne
doit pas se rétracter (voir la figure 14-2).
6. Choisir la nouvelle combinaison, l’écrire
à la page 25, puis entrer cette combi-
naison : bien appuyer sur les boutons
(un léger déclic doit se faire sentir A
chaque fois qu’un bouton est pressé).
Note: Vous pouvez utiliser un seul ou les
cinq boutons. Vous ne pouvez utiliser
chaque bouton qu’une seule fois. Vous
pouvez appuyer sur deux boutons ou plus
en même temps. Au moins 3 chiffres 14-4
sont recommandés dans le code.
27
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Changing the combination Cambio de la combinación

7. Turn the outside lever once, all the way, 7. Mueva la manija del lado de afuera
until it stops, hold in position and make hasta la posición tope; manténgala en
sure the latch is retracted fully (A). (See esa posición y asegúrese de que el
figure 14-5). Release the lever. pestillo está replegado (A). (Véase el
8. Turn the lever again to the stop posi- cuadro 14-5). Suelte la manija.
tion. At this point, the latch should not 8. Mueva otra vez la manija hasta la posi-
retract unless you enter the new combi- ción tope. En este punto, el pestillo no
nation (see figure 14-6). debería replegarse a menos que usted
9. Resecure the combination change plug coloque la combinación nueva (véase la
assembly by screwing it in clockwise ilustración 14-6).
with the DF-59 key — do not overtight- 9. Vuelva a colocar el cilindro para cam-
en (see figure 14-7). Remove the key biar la combinación atornillándolo hacia
and store it in a secure area with these la derecha con la llave DF-59 -— no
instructions and the spanner wrench. ajuste demasiado (véase la ilustración
14-7). Saque la llave y guárdela en un
lugar seguro con estas instrucciones y
la llave de arco.
Combination setting record Registro de combinaciones

15
Combination # Date Combinación # Fecha

_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________
28
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Changement de la combinaison
Suite
7. Abaisser la béquille extérieure une

seule fois, jusqu’en fin de course en
vous assurant que le pêne est rétracté
(A). (Voir le schéma 14-5). Relâcher la
béquille.
A
8. Abaisser à nouveau la béquille
jusqu’en fin de course. Le pêne ne
devrait pas se rétracter, à moins que la 14-5
nouvelle combinaison ne soit entrée
(voir figure 14-6).
9. Remettre le cylindre de changement de
combinaison en place en le serrant
dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre
avec la clé DF-59 : ne pas trop serrer
(voir figure 14-7). Retirer la clé et la
garder en lieu sûr avec ces instructions
ainsi que la clé à ergot.
Registre des combinaisons A
14-6
N de la combinaison Date
o
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________ 14-7
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
29
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Using the passage function Función de paso libre

16 Models 103x,104x Modelos 103x, 104x
Warning: When using the passage Advertencia: si se utiliza la función de

function, the following procedure must be paso libre, deberá seguirse el proced-
followed; otherwise, damage to the pas- imiento indicado a continuación; de lo
sage mechanism may result. contrario, pueden ocasionarse daños.
1. Enter the existing combination. 1. Ponga la combinación programada.
2. Turn the outside lever to the stop 2. Mueva la manija del lado de afuera
position and hold. hasta la posición tope y manténgala en
3. Keeping the outside lever in its turned esa posición.
position, rotate the passage turn knob 3. Manteniendo la manija en esa posición,
or keyed lock to the right (clockwise) to haga girar la perilla de paso libre o el
the horizontal position (A) (see figure cilindro de paso libre con llave hacia la
16-1). derecha hasta que quede en posición
4. Release the outside lever. The passage horizontal (A) (véase la ilustración 16-1).
function is now activated, so the door 4. Suelte la manija del lado de afuera. La
can be opened without entering a función de paso libre se ha activado,
combination. por lo tanto la puerta puede abrirse sin
To Cancel the Passage Function tener que poner una combinación.
Rotate the passage turn knob or keyed Para cancelar la función de paso libre:
lock to the left (counterclockwise) to the Haga girar la perilla de paso libre o la
vertical position (B) (see figure 16-2). The cerradura con llave hacia la izquierda
passage function is now deactivated, so hasta que quede en la posición vertical
the outside lever will not retract the latch (B) (véase la ilustración 16-2). La función
unless the combination is entered. de paso libre se desactiva, por lo tanto la
Note: Change the combination only when manija del lado de afuera no hará que se
the passage function is deactivated. repliegue el pestillo, a menos que se
coloque la combinación.
Observación: Antes de cambiar la comb-
inación, desactive la función de paso libre.
Preserving the latch Mantenimiento del pestillo

17
The door to frame relationship is critical for La relación entre puerta y marco es crítica
the performance and durability of the KABA para el rendimiento y durabilidad del
latch mechanism. The vertical and horizon- mecanismo del pestillo de KABA. Al colo-
tal center lines are important when posi- car la cerradura, la contra y el pestillo, las
tioning the lock, the strike, and the latch, líneas centrales, verticales y horizontales,
and must be according to ANSI* standard son importantes, y deben cumplir con la
A115.2. To insure proper installation, norma ANSI* A115.2. Para asegurar una
you must use the supplied strike plate. instalación adecuada, usted deberá
usar la placa de contra que viene con
la cerradura.
30
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Utilisation de la fonction de libre-accès

Modèles 103x, 104x
Avertissement: Suivre la procédure

suivante lors de l’utilisation de la fonction
de libre-accès pour ne pas endommager
le mécanisme.
1. Entrer la combinaison existante.
2. Abaisser la béquille extérieure jusqu’en A
fin de course et la maintenir dans cette
position. 16-1
3. En tenant la béquille extérieure abais-
sée, positionner le tourniquet ou l’en-
trée de clé vers la droite à l’horizontale
(A) (voir figure 16-1).
4. Relâcher la béquille extérieure. La
fonction de libre-accès est maintenant
activée et la porte peut être ouverte
sans que la combinaison ne soit entrée.
Pour annuler la fonction de libre-accès
Positionner le tourniquet ou l’entrée de clé
vers la gauche à la verticale (dans le sens
inverse des aiguilles d’une montre) (voir
figure 16-2). La fonction de libre-accès est B
maintenant désactivée et le pêne ne se 16-2
rétractera pas sous l’action de la béquille
extérieure, à moins d’entrer la combinaison.
N.B.: Ne changer la combinaison que
lorsque la fonction de libre-accès est
désactivée.
Alignement entre la porte et le jambage
L’alignement entre la porte et le jambage

est primordial pour le bon fonctionnement
et la durabilité du mécanisme de verrouil-
lage KABA. Il est très important de
respecter les normes ANSI* A115.2 ainsi
que les axes vertical et horizontal au
moment de poser la serrure, la gâche et le
pêne. Pour une installation adéquate,
utiliser la gâche fournie.
31
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Preserving the latch Mantenimiento del pestillo

Rubber bumpers (supplied with the lock) Para alinear adecuadamente la puerta
may be required to properly align the quizá se requieran topes de caucho (prov-
door. The adjustment becomes more sig- istos con la cerradura). El ajuste se hace
nificant with metal frames, wood doors, más importante en los casos de marcos
and filler plates when replacing existing de metal, puertas de madera, y placas de
hardware. Figure 17-1 shows the proper relleno cuando se cambian los herrajes
alignment between the door, the frame, existentes. La ilustración 17-1 muestra la
the latch, and the strike plate. alineación adecuada entre la puerta, el
When the door rests against the door marco, el pestillo y la placa de la contra.
stop, the deadlatch should seat against Cuando la puerta se apoya contra el tope,
the strike plate. At this point, you will el pin de seguridad debería apoyarse con-
notice a tolerance of 3⁄32” (2 mm), basic tra la placa de contra. Aquí notará una tol-
according to ANSI* standards. If the door erancia de 3⁄32 pulg. (2 mm), básica según
travels beyond this tolerance, the dead- las normas ANSI*. Si la puerta gira más
latch may slip into the strike box with the allá de esta tolerancia, el pin de seguridad
anti-friction device, causing the latch to puede deslizarse en la caja de la contra
jam, and create a lock-in and lock-out con el dispositivo de antifricción, haciendo
condition. (see Figure 17-2). que se atasque, y creando un bloqueo.
This condition can be prevented by adding (Véase la ilustración 17-2).
bumpers to the door stop. Esta situación puede prevenirse añadien-
* American National Standards Institute — do otros topes a los topes de la puerta.
contact KABA for more information. * Instituto Nacional Estadounidense de
Installing Rubber Bumpers (included Normas — para más información sírvase
with lock) entrar en contacto con KABA.
1. Close the door and apply pressure Instalación de los topes de caucho
making sure the deadlatch rests on the (incluidos con la cerradura)
strike plate (B). 1. Cierre la puerta y aplique presión,
2. Standing on the door stop side of the asegurándose que el pin de seguridad
door, check for gaps between the door se apoya en la placa de la contra.
and the door stop on all three sides of 2. Colocándose del lado donde va el tope
the frame (left, right, and top). Mark de la puerta, verifique los claros entre
locations where the gaps are approxi- la puerta y el tope en los tres lados del
mately 3⁄16” (5 mm) (see figure 17-3). marco (izquierdo, derecho y superior).
3. Clean area where bumpers are to be Marque los lugares donde los claros
applied for best adhesion. Make sure son de unos 3⁄16 pulg. (5 mm). (Véase la
these locations are free of grease and ilustración 17-3).
dust. 3. Limpie el área donde están ser solicita-
4. Peel the bumpers from their protective do los topes la mejor adhereia.
backing without touching the adhesive Asegúrese que estos lugares no tienen
surface and stick them on the marked grasa ni polvo.
locations on the door stop. 4. Saque la capa protectora de los topes
5. Allow 24 hours for adhesive to set sin tocar la superficie adhesiva y
before testing. The door may be oper- péguelos en los lugares marcados en
ated normally during this time. el tope de la puerta.
5. Antes de probar, deje pasar 24 horas
para que el adhesivo cumpla su fun-
ción. Durante este período la puerta
puede abrirse y cerrarse normalmente.
32
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1 15⁄16” (49mm) A
Alignement entre la porte et le jambage 3
⁄32” (2mm)
1 3⁄4” (44mm)
Suite 11
⁄32” (9mm)
B
Vous aurez peut-être à utiliser les butées
de caoutchouc fournies pour aligner la
porte correctement. L’ajustement est
encore plus important lorsqu’il s’agit de
remplacer du matériel déjà en place sur
des jambages de métal, des portes en
bois et des plaques de remplissage. La
figure 17-1 illustre le bon alignement qui
doit prévaloir entre la porte, le jambage, le
pêne et la gâche.
Lorsque la porte vient s’arrêter contre la
butée de porte, le contre-pêne de sécurité 17-1
devrait s’appuyer contre la gâche. Vous
pourrez noter un jeu de 3⁄32” (2 mm), norme
définie par ANSI*. Si la course de la porte
n’est pas limitée, le contre-pêne de sécur-
ité risque de glisser dans le logement de CORRECT
l’élément antifriction, interdisant ainsi
l’accès de l’intérieur comme de l’extérieur
(voir figure 17-2). Vous pouvez
limiter l’ouverture de la porte en plaçant
des butées de caoutchouc sur la butée de
porte.
* American National Standards Institute
(communiquer avec KABA pour obtenir de
plus amples renseignements) INCORRECT
Installation des butées de caoutchouc
(accessoire G de la liste de vérification)
1. Fermer la porte et appliquer une pres- 17-2
sion en vous assurant que le contre-
pêne de sécurité vient s’appuyer contre
la gâche (B).
2. En se plaçant du côté de la butée de
porte, vérifier le jeu entre la porte et la
butée de porte sur les trois côtés du
jambage (gauche, droite et dessus).
Marquer tout emplacement dont le jeu est
d’environ 3⁄16” (5 mm) (voir figure 17-3).
3. Nettoyez le secteur où des butoirs
doivent être appliqués pour la meilleure
adhérence.S’assurer que ces emplace-
ments sont dépourvus de graisse et de
poussière.
4. Enlever la bande adhésive qui recouvre
la butée de caoutchouc sans toucher à
la surface collante, puis la fixer à l’em-
pla-cement marqué.
5. Attendre 24 heures avant de vérifier la
pose. La porte peut toutefois être util-
isée pendant ce temps.
17-3
33
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Reset an Unknown Combination Reajuste una combinación desconocida

18
There is no procedure for determining an Para determinar cuál es la combinación de la
unknown combination from the front of the lock. cerradura desde la parte delantera de la
A lost combination must be cleared by remov- cerradura, no existe ningún procedimiento. Una
ing the combination chamber from the lock combinación perdida deberá anularse quitando la
cámara de combinación de la caja de la cerradura;
housing, then a new combination can be set. luego se podrá colocar una nueva combinación.
lock disASSEMBLY CERRADURA Desmontaje
1. Remove the back plate from the front lock 1. Quite la placa posterior de la cerradura
housing by removing the six back plate sacando los seis tornillos que van en esa placa.
screws.
2. Saque los dos tornillos Phillips (F), que fijan el
2. Remove the two Phillips head screws (F) soporte de guía (D) a la caja delantera. Tome el
securing the guide bracket (D) to the front soporte y deslícelo hacia atrás para que separe
housing. Grasp the guide bracket and slide it del embrague (ilustrac. 18-1).
back to disengage it from the clutch linkage. 3. Levante el varillaje de la cámara (A) para
(see figure 18-1) sacarlo del eje de control (B), palanqueando
3. Lift the two chamber links (A) off of the con un destornillador de cabeza plana. Marque
control shaft (B) using a small flat blade el varillaje para asegurarse que vuelve a colo-
screwdriver. Mark links to assure proper carlo en su lugar correspondiente (ilustrac. 18-
reassembly. (see figure 18-1) 1).
4. Remove the combination chamber (E) by 4. Quite la cámara de combinación (E) sacando
os tornillos Phillips (G), situados en cada
removing the Phillips head screws (G) at extremo de la cámara (ilustrac.18-1).
each end of the chamber. (see figure 18-1)
5. Quite el cojinete del eje (C) del eje de control
5. Remove shaft bushing (C) from control (ilustrac. 18-1).
shaft. (see figure 18-1)
NOTA: Para quitar los 3 echó a un lado “ marcado
NOTE: To remove the 3-sided dust cover del protector contra el polvo; Kaba, “ El “simplex,”
marked “Kaba,” “Simplex,” etc., place the com- los etc., ponen el compartimiento de la combi-
bination chamber in the position to the right. nación en la posición a la derecha.
6. Place a small screwdriver on the edge of 6. Coloque un pequeño destornillador en el borde
the 3-sided dust cover and push down on del protector contra el polvo echado a un lado 3
the screwdriver (see figure 18-2). The cover y empuje hacia abajo en el destornillador (véase
should pop loose. Once it does, pull the el cuadro 18-2). La cubierta debe hacer estallar
cover off of the combination chamber. flojamente. Una vez que hace, llevar a cabo la
cubierta del compartimiento de la combinación.
7. Hold the chamber in one hand by the screw
7. Lleve a cabo el compartimiento en una mano al
tab (b) on each end with the key-stems (c) lado de la lengüeta del tornillo (b) en cada
facing you and the control shaft (d) at the extremo con el revestimiento de los llave-vásta-
bottom (see figure 18-3). gos (c) usted y el eje del control (d) en la parte
8. Using pliers or equivalent, rotate the control inferior (véase el cuadro 18-3).
shaft (d) counter-clockwise and release to 8. Usando los alicates o equivalente, gire el eje del
clear the chamber (see figure 18-3). control (d) a la izquierda y lance para despejar el
9. L ook at the 5 code gears (e). If any code compartimiento (véase el cuadro 18-3).
gear pockets (f) are already at the shear line 9. Mire los 5 engranajes del código (e). Si algunos
(open position), ignore them. They are not bolsil los del engranaje del código (f) están ya en
used in the combination (see figure 18-4). a línea del esquileo (posición abierta), no haga caso
de ellos. No se utilizan en la combinación (véase el
Note: Shear line (open position) references the cuadro 18-4).
“L” shaped feet already align with the mating Nota: La línea del esquileo (posición abierta) se refiere
gear pocket. al “L” formó pies alinea ya con el bolsillo del engranaje
10. Find the code gear pocket/s (e) that is far- conjugado.
thest away from the shear line (open pos- 10.Encuentre el engranaje del código pocket/s (e)
ition). Depress that key-stem/s (c) and que está lo más lejos posible lejos de la línea del
release (see figure 18-4). If any digits in the esquileo (posición abierta). Presione ese key-
combination were depressed together (at the stem/s (c) y lance (véase el cuadro 18-4). Si
same time), then these must also be algunos dígitos en la combinación fueron pre
depressed together to reset the combination. sionados juntos (al mismo tiempo), después
éstos se deben también presionar juntos para r
11. Find the code gear pocket/s (e) that is the eajustar la combinación.
next farthest away from the shear line (open
position). Depress that key-stem/s (c) and 11. Encuentre el engranaje del código pocket/s (e)
release (see figure 18-4). que es el siguiente lo más lejos posible lejos de
la línea del esquileo (posición abierta). Presione
ese key-stem/s (c) y lance (véase el cuadro 18-4).
34
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Remettez à zéro une combinaison inconnue A
Il n’y a aucun moyen de trouver une

combinaison inconnue à partir du clavier de la serrure.
Pour annuler une combinaison
perdue, enlever la chambre à combinaison du boîtier B
de serrure, puis entrer une nouvelle combinaison.
SERRURE Desmontaje C
G
1. Enlever le palastre du boîtier de la serrure en
desserrant les six vis.
2. Retirer les deux vis Phillips (F) qui fixent le support D F
guide (D) et faire glisser celui-ci vers l’arrière pour
le désengager du train d’engrenage (voir figure 18-
1). E
3. Soulever les deux leviers de la chambre (A) hors
de l’arbre d’entraînement (B) à l’aide d’un tournevis 18-1
à lame plate. Marquer les leviers pour pouvoir les
reassembler correctement (voir figure 18-1).
4. Enlever la chambre à combinaison (E) en desser-
rant les vis Phillips (G) à chaque extrémité de la
chambre (voir figure 18-1).
5. Enlever la bague (C) de l’arbre d’entraînement (3 sided dust cover)
(voir figure 18-1).
NOTE: Pour enlever les 3 a dégrossi “ marqué de
cache anti-poussière ; Kaba, “ ; Le « simplex, » etc.,
placent la chambre de combinaison dans la position 18-2
vers la droite. b
6. Placez un petit tournevis sur le bord du cache anti-
poussière dégrossi par 3 et appuyez sur le
tournevis (voir le schéma 18-2). La couverture
devrait sauter lâchement. Une fois qu’elle fait, retir
er la couverture de la chambre de combinaison.
7. Tenez la chambre dans une main par l’étiquette de c(5)
vis (b) sur chaque extrémité avec le revêtement
des clef-tiges (c) vous et l’axe de commande (d)
au fond (voir le schéma 18-3).
8. Utilisant des pinces ou équivalent, tournez l’axe de d
commande (d) dans le sens contraire des aiguilles
d’une montre et libérez pour dégager la chambre
(voir le schéma 18-3).
9. Regardez les 5 vitesses de code (e). Si des poches
de vitesse de code (f) sont déjà à la ligne de
cisaillement (position d’ouverture), ignorez-les. b 18-3
Elles ne sont pas employées dans la combinaison
(voir le schéma 18-4). g
Note: La ligne de cisaillement (position d’ouverture) met c (5)
en référence le « L » a formé des pieds alignent déjà
avec la poche de pignon d’accouplement.
10. Trouvez la vitesse de code pocket/s (e) qui est le
plus loin à partir de la ligne de cisaillement (position
d’ouverture). Enfoncez ce key-stem/s (c) et libérez
(voir le schéma 18-4). Si des chiffres dans la com
binaison étaient diminués ensemble (en même
temps), alors ceux-ci doivent également être e (5)
enfoncés ensemble pour remettre à zéro la combi-
naison. d
11. Trouvez la vitesse de code pocket/s (e) qui est la
prochaine le plus loin à partir de la ligne de cisaille e
ment (position d’ouverture). Enfoncez ce key- f
stem/s (c) et libérez (voir le schéma 18-4). f
18-4
35
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Reset an Unknown Combination Reajuste una combinación desconocida

ote: If any of the code gear pockets travel past

N Nota: Si los bolsillos uces de los del engranaje del
the shear line, the key-stems have been depressed código viajan más allá de la línea del esquileo, los
in the wrong sequence. Start over at step 8. llave-vástagos se han presionado en la secuencia
incorrecta. Comience encima en el paso 8.
12. Repeat step 11 until all code gear pockets (e)
are at the shear line (open position). 12. Repita el paso 11 hasta que todo el engranaje del
código embolse (e) esté en la línea del esquileo
13. If all the code gear pockets (e) are not lined up ( posición abierta).
at the shear line (open position), start over at
step 8. 13. Si todos los bolsillos del engranaje del código (e)
14. Depress the lockout slide (g) at the top of the no se alinean en la línea del esquileo (posición
chamber and release (looks like one end of a abierta), comience encima en el paso 8.
spark plug) (see figure 18-5). 14. Presione el (G) de la diapositiva del cierre en la
15. Using pliers or equivalent, rotate the control tapa del compartimiento y lance (los parecer un
shaft (d) counter-clockwise to clear the cham- extremo de un enchufe de chispa) (véase el
ber and release. The lockout slide (g) should cuadro 18-5).
pop out (button underneath will stay 15. Usando los alicates o equivalente, gire el eje del
depressed) (see figure 18-5). control (d) a la izquierda para despejar el compar
16. Depress the key-stem/s (c) that you want in timiento y para lanzar. El (G) de la diapositiva del
the combination, releasing each after it is cierre debe hacer estallar hacia fuera (el botón
debajo permanecerá deprimido) (véase el cuadro
depressed (see figure 18-5). 18-5).
17. Once all the digits in the new combination 16. Presione el key-stem/s (c) que usted quiere en
have been depressed, with the pliers or la combinación, lanzando cada uno después de
equivalent, rotate the control shaft (d) clock que sea deprimido (véase el cuadro 18-5).
wise (see figure 18-5). The code change 17. Una vez todos los dígitos en la nueva combi-
button (h) underneath the lockout slide (g), nación se han presionado, con los alicates o el
should pop up (see figure 5). The new equivalente, gira el reloj del eje del control (d)
combination is now set. sabio (véase el cuadro 18-5). El cambio del códi
go botón (h) por debajo el (G) de la diapositiva
18. Look at the code gear pockets (e). The del cierre, debe surgir (véase el cuadro 5). El
numbers in the new combination should nuevo la combinación ahora se fija.
not be at the shear line (open position)
18. Mire los bolsillos del engranaje del código (e).
(see figure 18-5). los números en la nueva combinación deben no
ReASSEMBLY estar en la línea del esquileo (posición abierta)
(Véase el cuadro 18-5).
1. Replace the 3-sided dust cover marked
“Kaba”, “Simplex”, etc. Make sure the staked MONTAJE
joints on both end plates fit through the slots 1. Substituya el protector contra el polvo echado a
on the dust cover. Stake the 2 end plate joints. un lado 3 “Kaba marcado”, el “simplex”, el etc.
Reinstall the chamber into the lock. se cercioran de los empalmes estacados en
2. Resecure the shaft bushing (C) with flat side ambas placas de extremo cabidas a través de
las ranuras en el protector contra el polvo.
facing up. (see figure 18-8) Estaque los 2 empalmes de la placa de extremo.
3. Secure the combination chamber with the two Reinstale el compartimiento en la cerradura.
Phillips head screws (G) you removed earlier. 2. Resecure el buje del eje (c) con el revestimiento
4. Resecure the chamber links (A) onto the con- lateral plano para arriba. (véase el cuadro 18-8)
trol shaft exactly as they were removed. For 3. Fije la cámara de combinación con los dos tornil-
right hand locks, “C” goes on first, then “D”. los Phillips (G) que había sacado.
(see Figure 18-6). For left hand locks, “D” goes
4. Resecure el compartimiento liga (a) sobre el eje
on first, then “C”. (see figure 18-7). del control exactamente como fueron quitados.
Para las cerraduras derechas, “C” se enciende
5. Replace the guide bracket (D) by aligning the primero, entonces “D”. (Véase el cuadro 18-6).
clutch linkage in the guide bracket and secure Para las cerraduras de la mano izquierda, “D” se
with the two Phillips head screws (F) previous- enciende primero, entonces “C”. (Véase el
ly removed. cuadro 18-7).
Note: Right hand lever locks require the 5. Vuelva a colocar el soporte de guía (D)
drive shaft pins to be vertical with the front lock alineando el tren de engranajes en el soporte y
housing. Left hand lever locks require the drive fíjelo con los dos tornillos Phillips (F) que había
shaft pins to be horizontal to the front lock housing. sacado.
(see figures 18-6 & 18-7) Nota: las cerraduras con manijas a derechas
requieren las clavijas del eje estén en posición hori-
6. Replace the back plate and secure it with the zontal con respecto a la caja de la cerradura
six back plate screws. (véanse las ilustraciones 18-6 y 18-7).
For further assistance call 6. Vuelva a colocar la placa posterior y fíjela con
1-800-849-TECH (8324) los seis tornillos correspondientes.
Para más información llame al
36 1-800-849-TECH (8324)
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
g
Remettez à zéro une combinaison inconnue h
c (5)
Suite
Note : Si les poches l’unes des de vitesse de

code voyagent après la ligne de cisaillement, les
clef-tiges ont été enfoncées dans l’ordre faux.
Commencez plus d’à l’étape 8.
12. Répétez l’étape 11 jusqu’à ce que toute la
vitesse de code empoche (e) soyez à la ligne
de cisaillement (position d’ouverture).
d
13. Si toutes les poches de vitesse de code (e)
ne sont pas alignées à la ligne de cisaille- e
ment (position d’ouverture), commencez plus
d’à l’étape 8.
14. Diminuez la glissière (G) de verrouillage au
dessus de la chambre et libérez (des ressem-
bler à une extrémité d’une bougie d’allumage) 18-5
(voir le schéma 18-5).
15. En utilisant la pince ou l’équivalent, tournez
l’axe du contrôle (d) à gauche pour dégager
le compartiment et pour le lancer. Le (g) de la A
diapositive de la fermeture doit faire exploser
vers dehors (le bouton restera au-dessous
enfoncé) (voir le tableau 18-5).
16. Enfoncez le key-stem/s (c) que vous voulez
dans la combinaison, libérant chacun après
qu’il soit déprimé (voir le schéma 18-5).
17. Une fois tous les chiffres dans la nouvelle
combinaison ont été enfoncés, avec les
pinces ou l’équivalent, tournent l’horloge de
l’axe de commande (d) sage (voir le schéma C D
18-5). Le changement de code bouton (h)
sous la glissière (G) de verrouillage, devrait
sauter vers le haut (voient le schéma 5). Le
nouveau la combinaison est maintenant
placée. 18-6
18. Regardez les poches de vitesse de code (e).
les nombres dans la nouvelle combinaison
devraient ne pas être à la ligne de cisaille-
ment (position d’ouverture) (Voir le schéma A
18-5).
RÉASSEMBLAGE
1. Remplacez le cache anti-poussière dégrossi
par 3 « Kaba » marqué, le « simplex », etc.
s’assurent les joints jalonnés sur les deux
plaques d’extrémité adaptées par les fentes
sur le cache anti-poussière. Jalonnez les 2
joints de plaque d’extrémité. Réinstallez la
chambre dans la serrure.
C D
2. Resecure la douille d’axe (c) avec le revête-
ment latéral plat vers le haut. (voir le schéma
18-8)
3. Fixer la chambre à combinaison à l’aide des
deux vis Phillips (G) retirées précédemment. 18-7
4. Resecure la chambre lie (a) sur l’axe de com-
mande exactement comme ils ont été
enlevés. Pour les serrures droites, « C » con- A
tinue d’abord, puis « D ». (Voir le schéma 18-
6). Pour des serrures de main gauche, « D »
continue d’abord, puis « C ». (Voir le schéma
18-7).
5. Replacer le support guide (D) en alignant le
train d’engrenage dans le support et fixer B
avec les deux vis (F) retirées précédemment.
Note : Pour être à la verticale avec le boîtier, les C G
serrures à béquille à main droite nécessitent des
goupilles d’arbre tandis que les serrures à
béquille à main gauche nécessitent des goupilles D F
d’arbre pour être à l’horizontale (voir figures 18-6
et 18-7).
6. Remplacez le plat arrière et fixez-le avec les E
six vis de plat arrière. 18-8
Pour plus de renseignements composer :
1-800-849-TECH (8324) 37
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Troubleshooting Determinación de fallas

19
? Outside lever when turned always retracts ? Cuando se hace girar la perilla del lado
latch without depressing any buttons. de afuera siempre se repliega el pestil-
Lock is in zero combination. lo, sin oprimir ningún botón.
La cerradura está en la combinación cero.
+ Follow the procedure for changing a
combination except omit step 3 (do not
enter the existing combination).
+ Siga el procedimiento indicado para
cambiar una combinación, pero omita el
The threaded rod from the combination paso 3 (no coloque la combinación
? programada).
change assembly remains in the lock after
assembly is removed. ? La varilla roscada de la cerradura de
Combination change assembly was over control permanece en la cerradura
tightened when put on the door. después de quitarse.
If necessary, remove lock from door. Using La cerradura de control se apretó
+ a vice-grip wrench, turn at the middle of demasiado, al ponerse en la puerta.
the rod, to avoid stripping the active + Con una llave tipo morsa, gire en el medio
threads, and turn counterclockwise to de la varilla, para evitar dañar los filetes en
remove the rod from the lock. Put the rod uso y gire hacia la izquierda para sacar la
back into the control lock and tighten varilla de la cerradura. Ponga nuevamente
spring nut, remount lock on door. la varilla en la cerradura de control y ajuste
? After entering a new combination, the lock la tuerca de resorte.
works one time only; then the lock fails to ? Después de colocar una combinación
open. nueva, la cerradura funciona una vez
Buttons of intended combination were únicamente; luego no abre.
not fully depressed when changing Al cambiar la combinación, los botones
combination. de la combinación que se trató de poner
+ Refer to pages 36 & 38 - Reset an
Unknown Combination.
no se presionaron completamente.
+ Consulte las páginas 36 y 38 —
Reseting una combinación desconocida.
? Correct code is depressed, outside knob
turns about 10 degrees and latch partially
retracts then jams. Key override in outside
? Se colocó el código correcto, la perilla
del lado de afuera gira unos 10 grados
knob cannot retract latch. Inside knob y el pestillo se repliega parcialmente y
cannot retract latch. uego se atranca. No se puede mover
The deadlatch is wedged into the strike box, el pestillo con la llave de sobrecontrol
caused by improper door, door stop, and colocada en la perilla del lado de
strike plate alignment. afuera. La perilla del lado de adentro
Saw or break the latch to gain access or to no puede mover el pestillo.
+ get out. Replace the latch and adjust the
El pin de seguridad se ha atascado en
door/frame alignment to prevent a similar la caja de la contra, debido a una alin-
occurrence. If outside lever was forced to eación inadecuada de la puerta, tope
retract the latch, the chamber control shaft de la puerta y placa de la contra.
may have twisted. Replace the chamber.
= Symptom/problem + Es necesario serrar o romper el pestillo
para entrar o salir. Vuelva a colocar el
? = Síntoma/problema
= Problème pestillo y ajuste la alineación de
= Possible cause puerta/marco para impedir que ocurra
= Causa posible
= Cause possible
nuevamente. Si la perilla del lado de
= Remedy afuera se forzó para replegar el pestillo,
+ = Solución
= Solution
el eje de control de la cámara puede
haberse torcido. Cambie la cámara.
38
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Dépannage
? Sous l’action de la poignée extérieure, le

pêne se rétracte sans que vous n’ayez
appuyé sur aucun bouton.
La serrure ne possède aucune combinaison.
+ Vous reporter à Changement de la

combinaison. Ne pas tenir compte de
l’étape 3 (combinaison déjà existante).
? Le boulon fileté du cylindre reste dans la

serrure lorsqu’on le retire.
Le cylindre a été vissé trop serré lors de
son installation.
+ Àdul’aide d’une pince-étau, serrer au centre

boulon pour ne pas endommager le
filetage, puis tourner en dans le sens
inverse des aiguilles d’une montre pour
retirer le boulon du cylindre. Remettre le
boulon en place dans le cylindre, puis
serrer l’écrou-ressort.
? Après avoir entré la nouvelle combinaison,

la serrure fonctionne une première fois,
puis interdit l’accès par la suite.
Les boutons-poussoirs de la combinaison
choisie n’ont pas été pressés complètement
au moment de changer la combinaison.
+ Vous reporter à Reseting une combinai-

son inconnue, pages 37 et 39.
? La bonne combinaison est entrée, la

poignée extérieure tourne environ à un
angle de 10 degrés, le pêne se rétracte
partiellement, puis se bloque. Ni la clé de
commande prioritaire ni la poignée intérieure
ne peuvent faire rétracter le pêne.
Le contre-pêne de sécurité est bloqué
dans le boîtier antipoussière en raison
d’un mauvais alignement de la porte, de la
butée de porte et de la gâche.
+ Scier ou forcer le pêne pour entrer ou sor-

tir. Pour empêcher que cette situation ne
se reproduise, vous reporter à Alignement
entre la porte et le jambage. L’arbre d’en-
traînement de la chambre à combinaison
peut avoir été tordu en forçant la poignée
extérieure pour faire rétracter le pêne.
Remplacer le pêne et la chambre à
combinaison.
39
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Notes
40
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Notes
41
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Kaba Access & Data Systems Americas

2941 Indiana Avenue
Winston-Salem, NC 27105 USA
Tel: 800.849.8324 336.725.1331
Fax: 800.346.9640 336.725.3269
www.kaba-adsamericas.com PKG2281 0114
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
DOORNICS PT-RO1 INSTANT HARDWARE

Phone: (301) 417-9494
POWER TRANSFER
Tag # 21 - Electric Power Transfer - USBP - PT R01
PT-R01
ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER
The PT-R01 electric power transfer provides protection and means of transferring electrical power
or Pnewmatic tube which links the from the door frame to the door leaf from the hinge side. It is
flush with the frame with the flexible loop being attached to the door leaf. Designed as a
concealed power transfer,
The PT-R01 has complete range of motion from 0-180° and is not limited by the type of hinge. All butt, pivot,
geared and wide swing hinges will have complete range of motion. Constructed from zinc plated steel and
stamped stainless steel face plate, provides an excellent finish along with extreme durability and corrosion
resistant properties. This unit offers a high level of security for the cable and is hidden from view making it
aesthetically pleasing. The PT-R01 also allows for removal of wires to be replaced with a pneumatic hose if
required.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
SPECIFICATIONS
HOUSING:
160mm x 25mm x 62.5mm
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Two 18ga wires,

Three 24ga wires
Shipping Weight 1 LB
Warrenty
1 Year
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # 23 - Panic Exit Device - Von Duprin - EL98TP x 990TP

98/99 Rim exit device
The 299 Strike ships

standard, optional strikes
available
98 and 99 Rim exit devices for all types of single and double doors with mullion, UL listed for panic Hex key dogging comes standard
exit hardware. Devices are ANSI A156.3 – 2014 Grade 1. The 98 device has a smooth mechanism case on 98/99 Rim exit devices
and the 99 device has a grooved case. The rim device is non-handed except when the following
device options are used: SD (special dogging), -2 (double cylinder) or SS (signal switch). See
Opposite page for available outside trim and device functions. Covers stock hollow metal doors with
86 or 161 cutouts on single doors (may cover cutouts on pairs – consult template).
Finishes – US3, US3A, US4, US4A, US10, US26, US26D, US26D-AM Antimicrobial, US28, 313, 315 &
643E. US15 and US32D available with 98 Series only.
Specifications XP CD
Extra protection Cylinder dogging
Device functions Device ships EO/DT/NL. Field selectable. For TP, K or L remove
• 90˚ latch-to- • Replaces hex key
NL drive screw from device. strike contact dogging
98/99 Rim exit device
Device lengths 3' 2'4' to 3' (711mm to 914 mm) Door size • Force resistance • Requires 1 1/4"
4' 2'10" to 4' (864 mm to 1219 mm) Door size of 2,000+ lbs. mortise cylinder
Device centerline 39 13/16" (1011 mm) with inverted cam
from finished floor 39 11/16" (1008 mm) with mullion
Center case 8" x 2 3/4" x2 3/8" (203mm x 70mm x 60mm) QEL RX
dimensions Quiet electric Pushpad monitor
Mechanism case 2 1/4" x 2 1/4" (57mm x 57mm) latch retraction switch
dimensions • Bolt retraction via • Signals use of an
switch opening
Projection Pushbar neutral – 3 13/16" (97 mm) • Converts exit • SPDT switch to
Pushbar depressed – 3 1/16" (78 mm) door to push-pull monitor pushpad
operation
Latch bolt Deadlocking, 3/4" (19mm) throw
Fasteners & sex Includes screw pack for 1 3/4" (44mm) and 2 1/4" (57mm) thick
CX AX
bolts (SNB) metal or wood doors. Optional 425 SNB available,
Chexit delayed Accessible device
see page 9 for quantities.
exit • UL certified to
Electric options LX Latchbolt monitor switch • Meets NFPA 101 meet new 5 lb.
RX Pushpad monitor switch requirements maximum
RX2 Double pushpad monitor switch • Self-contained operating force
E Electric locking & unlocking trim controls, locking, requirement
EL Electric latch retraction alarm • Exceeds ANSI/
BHMA
QEL Quiet electric latch retraction requirements
SS Signal switch
CX Chexit delayed exit EL ALK
ALK Alarm exit kit
Electric latch Alarm exit kit
WP-RX Waterproof request to exit retraction • Unauthorized
CON Allegion Connect • Enables remote opening triggers
Mechanical -2 Double cylinder unlatching 85-decibel horn
options AX Accessible device • Alternative to • Set in armed or
GBK Glass bead kit manual dogging disarmed mode
by key
PN Pneumatic latch retraction
XP Extra protection
SNB Sex bolts PN CON
SEC Security screws Pneumatic latch Allegion
retraction Connectors
Dogging feature Hex key dogging standard
• For areas where • Common
Dogging options CD Cylinder dogging electrical devices connectors to
SD Special center case dogging banned connect various
LD Less dogging • Special linkage door hardware all
for mechanical or the way to the
DI Dogging indicator power supply
pneumatic
CI Cylinder dogging indicator dogging
Strikes 299 – Dull black
8 • Von Duprin • 98/99 Series

UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
98/99 Optional trim

Knob, exit only and thumbpiece trim – 990 & 996K
K K-NL K-BE K-DT EO TP TP-BE EO
Thumbpiece
Knob – blank blank
Knob – night latch escutcheon Knob – dummy Thumbpiece escutcheon
Knob Key retracts Always operable trim Key locks & Always operable
Key locks & unlocks latchbolt (no cylinder) Pull when dogged Exit only plate unlocks (no cylinder) Exit only plate
Trim
996K 996K-NL 996K-BE 996K-DT 996EO 990TP 990TP-BE 990EO
description
Escutcheon 23/4" x 103/4" x 27/32" 23/4" x 103/4" x 27/32" 23/4" x 103/4" x 27/32" 23/4" x 103/4" x 27/32" 23/4" x 103/4" x 27/32" 3" x 143/16" x 3/32" 3" x 143/16" x 3/32" 3" x 143/16" x 3/32"
plate size (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (76x360x2mm) (76x360x2mm) (76x360x2mm)
Pull center
— — — — — 51/2" (140mm) 51/2" (140mm) 51/2" (140mm)
to center
Projection 31/4" (83mm) 31/4" (83mm) 31/4" (83mm) 31/4" (83mm) — 2" (51mm) 2" (51mm) Z
ANSI
08 09 14 02 01 05 15 14
function
Cylinder
type
Rim or
Trim options
vertical rod Rim Rim — — — Rim — —

device
Mortise lock 1
1 /4" Mortise 11/4" Mortise — 11/4" Mortise — —
device
Handing — — — — — — — —
#425 SNB
optional-
HMD req. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
WD w/o
SLM pkg.
#825 SNB
req. WD w/o
SLM pkg F 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rim device
ONLY
#425 SNB
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
req. w/499F
52 • Von Duprin • 98/99 Series

UNCLASSIFIED
>?@ABCDEFGH@BIAJKDALM
0124567
UNCLASSIFIED
89
Tag # 39 - Electromagnetic Locking Device - Dynalock - 2268-10 x DYN

9

NOPQRRSTUVPWXVYZW[P\V\P\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVPWTaRbVRcZdQT\V^Wc`]\eVdWZVRS̀_P\VQèVeWcfP\VWc]RXS̀_VWZV
S̀RXS̀_VeWWZRgVVh\]ZW[]RVRW^\V\iSR]S̀_VPWTaRg
jSk\lVmnopqrUsViVmUtViVquUvVjS̀_P\VWZVmwUvVsWcfP\
xcP]SnyWP]Q_\V[\PenR\P\T]QfP\VqmpmuVzsO
¼¼½º¾ OcZZ\`]VsZQXlVw{oV^|V}VqmzsOVjS̀_P\VpVqqrrV^|VsWcfP\
V V oowV^|V}VmuzsOVjS̀_P\VpVr~V^|VsWcfP\
¨Ô§>KJ J J ÕÖÔ§×Ø¢J J J «ÙªÙ¦ÚJ Û>ÙÜÚ¢J
V jS̀_P\VP\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVvWTaVc]RXS̀_V VVV VVjm{VV VVVVVVVvfRg
¼¼½ºà V jS̀_P\VP\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVvWTaV¡QSZVc]RXS̀_V VVjm{VV VVVVVVVvfRg
V sWcfP\VP\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVvWTaV¡QSZVc]RXS̀_V VVjm{VV VVVVq{VvfRg
¢£V jS̀_P\VP\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVvWTaV¤`RXS̀_V VV VVjm{VV VVVVqmVvfRg
¢£V sWcfP\VP\T]ZW^Q_`\]STVvWTaV¡QSZV¤`RXS̀_V VVjm{VV VVVVmuVvfRg
¼¼½º¼¾
ÔÕ¢ÙÔª¦J J J J J J J J J
¥¢¦ |`]Sn¬Q^Y\ZVjXS]TVnVjS_`QPRVZ\^WyQPVWdV]\VWcRS̀_VTWy\Zg
Ý§¦¨ sWWZVj]Q]cRVjXS]TVnVjS_`QPRVeWWZVTPWR\eVWZVQ®QZg
§¦¨ ¯°°±²³³´µ²¶·³¸¹º»°±³¹¼¼½º¼¾²±·µ¿
Ý§©ª sÀ`QR]Q]VÁWZT\Vj\`RWZVnV¤èSTQ]\RV\ÂTS\`]V^Q_`\]STVfWèg
§©ª sÀ`QR]Q]VÁWZT\Vj\`RWZVnVÁWZV]\Vmmr{nmVj\ZS\Rg
ÝK>§ Ã·ºÄ°Å°±ÆÇ¯º»°±Å°¸Åµ·ÈÅ·È°ÉÅ°¸Êµ³³´µ¿
Ëh\ÌcSZ\RVsÍÎVY]SW`Ï
K>§ Ã·ºÄ°Å°±ÆÇ¯ÐµÑ¼Òº»°±³¹¼¼½º¼¾²±·µ¿
¼¼½ºáâ¾ Ëh\ÌcSZ\RVsÍÎmVY]SW`Ï
¦« jY\TSQPVÁS̀SRVnVj]QèQZeV[`SRVjm{gVjY\TSQPVQ`WeSk\eV[`º
SR\RVR\\VYQ_\Vwrg
¢§ ¬S^\Vs\PQÀVnVqnrVR\TWèRgVÁWZVmmr{nqVÓVmmr{nqwVW`PÀg
¢§ ¬S^\Vs\PQÀVnVqnrVR\TWèRgVÁWZV]\Vmmr{nmVW`PÀg
ÎW]\RlVÞVsjxbVsÍÎVQèVvsVWY]SW`RV`W]VQyQSPQfP\VW`V]\Vmmr{nqwVj\ZS\RgV
¼¼½ºáâ¼¾ V ÁWZV|OVY\ZQ]SW`VWZe\ZVß~{{V¡Z\nXSZ\eVZ\TZS]S\ZVfZSe_\gVj\\VYQ_\Vu{g
J¦@CI@MJ JKëìJ̈DCBIM@JKDAL
ÇÅ¸³±°ãÈ³·¸Å°¸Êäã°±³·µã°´È³åÉ°±µÅ·å·Èå°°±¿
»·ÅåµÅ¸³æÅ¼ç¼èé¯Ä
jSk\lVqnqpmUêViV{nopuUtViVqnqp{UsV
OcZZ\`]VsZQXlVo{qV^|V}VqmzsO
¼½¾¾ V V mwV^|V}VmuzsO
¨Ô§>KJ J J ÕÖÔ§×Ø¢J J J «ÙªÙ¦ÚJ Û>ÙÜÚ¢
JV jS̀_P\VxWZ]SR\VvWTaVnVqmpmuVzsOVV V VVjm{VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVuVvfRg
ÔÕ¢ÙÔª¦J J J J J J J J J J
ÎW]\RlVÁWZV|OV ¥¨í î±ã³´±ï°´È³·ÈÃÅ°¸Ê
WY\ZQ]SW`VWZe\ZV §©ª sÀ`QR]Q]VÁWZT\Vj\`RWZVnV¤èSTQ]\RV\ÂTS\`]V^Q_`\]STVfWèg
ñò¾±º¶·±å ¨í xWc`]S̀_VðZQTa\]RVnV¬XWVYS\T\VaS]g
h\T]S[\ZVðZSe_\gV ¦« jY\TSQPVÁS̀SRVnVj]QèQZeV[`SRVjm{gVjY\TSQPVQ`WeSk\e
j\\VYQ_\Vu{g [`SR\RVR\\VYQ_\Vwrg
!"#"$%& '($)*++*,-./0!1 UNCLASSIFIED
2"3)*4*55*66 7,89"/%:;!%<=*
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # A - Weather Stripping - USBP Standard Weatherstrip
“Protecting People and Property”
BULLET, BLAST, AND FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT SYSTEMS
WINDO-PILE®
Meets industry demands for vinyl and aluminum windows & doors.
Total polypropylene construction provides good air control and operating ease on all types of windows. The stiff
polypropylene backing aids pile insertion and retains position without shrinkage or shifting. Recommended compression
of polypropylene pile is 15% to 20%. Available with or without adhesive.
Windo-Pile® Numbering System
Part Number: 25035075BKWP
1 2 3 4 5 6
25 0187 45 WH WP -------
Pile Height Base Width Density Color Product Type Special Instructions
*Pile height starts at .110" to .600" in .010" increments. For Example…
2. Base
1. Pile Height 3. Density 4. Color 5. Product Type 6. Special Instructions
Width
Pile Base
Code Code Pics Ends Density Code Color Code Product Code Instruction Code
Height Width
Special
instructions
.130" 13 .187" 0187 28 2 Standard 30 Gray GY Window Pile WP S
assigned at
factory
Window Pile -
.200" 20 .270" 0270 28 2 Premium 45 Black BK WPSR
single row
Window Pile
*High (.270,
.250" 25 .350" 0350 28 2 75 White WH w/adhesive AB
.350 & .437)
backing
.500" 50 .437" 0437 Beige BG
*Only available in Gray and Black
United States Bullet Proofing, Inc. (800) 363-8328 Toll Free

16201 Branch Court (301) 218-7920 Local
Upper Marlboro, MD 20774 (301) 218-7925 Fax
www.usbulletproofing.com info@usbulletproofing.com
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # B - Threshold - USBP THRESHOLD
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # B - Sill Sweep - Pemko - 315CN

TITLE:
PREPARED FOR:
PREPARED BY:
DOOR BOTTOMS: DOOR BOTTOM SWEEPS
DATE:
315_N COMMENTS:
AVAILABLE FINISHES: B, C, D, G, SN
WIDTH: 1/4” (6.4 mm)
PROFILE HEIGHT: 1-1/4” (31.8 mm)
TOTAL HEIGHT WITH INSERT: 1-11/16” (42.9 mm)
B (Mill Finish Extruded Bronze [Brass]) Copyright © 2008 Pemko Manufacturing Co. All rights reserved.
C (Clear Anodized Aluminum) Reproduction in whole or in part without the express written
D (Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum) permission of Pemko Manufacturing Co. is prohibited.
G (Gold Anodized Aluminum)
SN (Satin Nickel Anodized Aluminum) 315_N_CUT Rev 1 - 05.14.08
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag C - Terminal Block - This is just part of the door and is just an access panel. No
PD data for this.
Tag # D - Aluminum Hinge Pin - This is just part of the door. It is just an aluminum
pin.
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Tag # G - Silencer - IVES - SR 64
Door silencers
SR64 Door silencer - metal
Hinges & pivots

For use on metal frames featuring pneumatic design that, once installed,forms an
air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing
A
Tamper-proof once installed on the frame
Proper installation also eliminates door rattle and provides constant tension for
door latches or locks
Packed in bags of 100
Grey also available in bulk pack of 2500
Each bag has an installation tool included
Certifications Dimensions
Pulls &plates
Meets ANSI/BHMA 156.16, L03011 Diameter: 1/2"
Thickness: 1/8" (projection from
B
Material substrate
frame when inserted)
Made from 60 Durometer styrene
butadiene rubber
Finishes
BHMA Description Substrate Finish
Flush bolts & coordinators

--- Grey Rubber GRY
For other colors, consult factory.
C
SR65 Door silencer - wood
For use on wood frames, also feature pneumatic design to cushion shock and
absorb noise
Latches, catches & bolts

To prevent removal, a small brad should be driven into stop strip and through stem
of silencer, as shown in the detail
Packed in bags of 100
D
Meets ANSI/BHMA 156.16, L03021 Height: 3/4"
Width: 3/8"
Material substrate
butadiene rubber
Finishes
--- Grey Rubber GRY
E25
Stops
SR66 Door silencer - adhesive

Self adhesive rubber silencers
Economical installation requires no drilling of frames Exterior hardware
Packed two sheets of 50 (100 minimum) F
Meets ANSI/BHMA 156.16, L03021 Diameter: 1/2"
Material substrate
butadiene rubber
Miscellaneous hardware
Finishes
--- Brown Rubber BRN
G
--- Grey Rubber GRY

--- White Rubber WHT
E25
Ives Architectural hardware products
UNCLASSIFIED

Paragraph Number 1.3.C
ITEM NO. 2
SHOP DRAWINGS
NOTES TO REVIEWER
2. No Variation.
083185-014-00.
083185-014-00.
083185-014-00.
CUSH
LL1021M LL1021M
083185-014-00.
CUSH

Paragraph Number 1.3.E
ITEM NO. 3 & 4
HARDWARE SCHEDULE INDEX
NOTES TO REVIEWER
2. No Variation.
UNCLASSIFIED
FEBR DOOR ‐ SCHEDULE
SCAC
FIRE DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR GLAZING FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME DOOR
Building Level DOOR NO. ROOM NAME DOS CODE FE/BR HDWR. SET REMARKS Included With Door Submittal Hardware Submittal Submittal Note DOOR NO.
RATING WIDTH HEIGHT TYPE MTL. FINISH SWING TYPE TYPE MTL. FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL MANUFACTURER
TEMP TRASH TRANSFER OVERHEAD COILING DOOR ‐ USE TWO (2)
SCAC L2 5201/1 2141 ‐ 5 MIN FE SEE COMMENTS 3000 3250 D13 SS HC5 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ HC5 1/A903 2/A903 3/A903 PADLOCKS ‐ MEDECO 54‐510R00KA TBD 083323 5201/1
EXTERIOR Not In this Submittal Package
RECEIVING OVERHEAD COILING DOOR ‐ USE TWO (2)
SCAC L2 5202/3 2141 ‐ 5 MIN FE SEE COMMENTS 3000 3250 D13 SS HC5 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ HC5 1/A903 2/A903 3/A903 PADLOCKS ‐ MEDECO 54‐510R00KA TBD 083323 5202/3
EXTERIOR Not In this Submittal Package
GUARD BOOTH 15 MIN SG‐2 ISF‐7 Window Wall submitted via 086625‐
SCAC L2 5209 1123 ‐ SHW‐3 940 2440 D8 STL/AC ANOD‐B RHRB F1 STL/AC ANOD‐B 1/A913 8/A914 7A914 USBP 083185‐014‐00 087145‐009‐00 5209
FE/BR SG‐D 007
SECURITY SCREENING 15 MIN SG‐2 PNEUMATIC (H.C.) OPERATOR SF‐2 Window Wall submitted via 086625‐
SCAC L2 5210/1 1123 ‐ SHW‐5A 940 2440 D5 STL/AC ANOD‐B LHRB F1 STL/AC ANOD‐B 1/A913 8/A914 7/A913 USBP 083185‐014‐00 087145‐009‐00 5210/1
FE/BR SG‐D 007
SECURITY SCREENING ‐
SCAC L2 5210/2 1141 ‐ 5 MIN FE SHW‐12K 940 2440 D5 STL HC5 RHRB F1 STL HC5 1/A902 4/A902 7/A902 USBP 083185‐014‐00 087145‐009‐00 5210/2
SG‐D
SECURITY SCREENING SG‐2 PNEUMATIC (H.C.) OPERATOR SF‐6 Window Wall submitted via 086625‐
SCAC L2 5210/3 1141 ‐ 5 MIN FE SHW‐12J 1054 2440 D5 STL/AC ANOD‐B LHRB F1 STL/AC ANOD‐B 1/A913 4/A913 7/A913 USBP 083185‐014‐00 087145‐009‐00 5210/3
SG‐D 007
PAGE 1 OF 1
UNCLASSIFIED

Paragraph Number 1.3.B
ITEM NO. 5 & 6
Wiring and Operating
NOTES TO REVIEWER
2. No Variation.
This is attached in the product data

UNCLASSIFIED
Finish Chart
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
1.3.B.1 - Finishes Chart
Finish chart
BHMA US Description Base material
609 US5 Satin brass plated, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated Aluminum
628 US28 Satin aluminum, clear coated Aluminum
666 US3 Bright brass plated, clear coated Aluminum
666 US3AL Bright brass plated, clear coated Aluminum
667 US4 Satin brass plated, clear coated Aluminum
668 US10A Satin bronze plated, clear coated Aluminum
668 US10AL Satin bronze plated, clear coated Aluminum
669 US14 Bright nickel plated Aluminum
670 US15 Satin nickel plate Aluminum
673 US92 Aluminum, clear coated Aluminum
689 US65 Aluminum painted Aluminum
702 US26D Satin chrome plated Aluminum
703 US10B Oxidized satin bronze plated, oil rubbed Aluminum
710 313AN Dark bronze anodized Aluminum
711 315AN Black anodizes Aluminum
713 US26D Aluminum
716 A10B Satin bronze plated, clear coated Aluminum
BLK Black epoxy coated Aluminum
W White epoxy coated Aluminum
T Tan epoxy coated Aluminum
BRN Brown epoxy coated Aluminum
CLR Clear expoxy coated Aluminum
US5 Satin brass plated, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated Aluminum
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Finishes (cont.)
A5 Aluminum Aluminum
AP Aluminum, prime paint Aluminum
R Red epoxy coated Aluminum
US26D Satin chrome plated Aluminum
690 US69 Dark bronze painted Any
605 US3 Bright brass, clear coated Brass
606 US4 Satin brass, clear coated Brass
689 SP28 Aluminum painted Brass
691 SP10 Light bronze painted Brass
693 SPBLK Black painted Brass
695 SP313 Dark bronze painted Brass
706 SP4 Brass Brass
716 Satin bronze plated, clear coated Brass
P600 P600 Primed for paint Brass
BRN Brown Brass
GRY Gray Brass
TAN Tan Brass
White White rubber Brass
618 US14 Bright nickel plated, clear coated Brass, Bronze
619 US15 Satin nickel plated, clear coated Brass, Bronze
620 US15A Satin nickel plated, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated Brass, Bronze
622 US19 Flat black coated Brass, Bronze
625 US26 Polished chrome plated Brass, Bronze
626 US26D Satin chrome plated Brass, Bronze
612 US10 Satin bronze, clear coated Bronze
613 US10B Dark oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed finish Bronze
White White Plastic
BLK Black plastic Plastic
BRN Brown plastic Plastic
CLR Clear plastic Plastic
P Plastic Plastic
A3 Rubber Rubber
R Rubber Rubber
Brown Brown rubber Rubber
Tan Tan rubber Rubber
Gray Gray rubber Rubber
629 US32 Polished stainless steel Stainless steel 300
630 US32D Satin stainless steel Stainless steel 300
654 US32D Satin stainless steel Stainless steel 400
600 USP Primed for paint - steel Steel
600 FP Primed for paint - steel Steel
603 2G Zinc plated Steel
UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
Finishes (cont.)
603 2C Zinc plated Steel

604 2G Zinc plated/dichromate sealed Steel
632 US3 Bright brass plated, clear coated Steel
638 US5 Satin brass plated, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated Steel
639 US10 Satin bronze plated, clear coated Steel
640 US10B Dark oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed finish Steel
645 US24 Bright nickel plated, clear coated Steel
646 US15 Satin nickel plated, clear coated Steel
652 US26D Satin chrome plated Steel
689 SP28 Aluminum painted Steel
693 SPBLK Black painted Steel
695 SP313 Dark bronze painted Steel
695 SP313 Dark bronze painted Steel
706 SP4 Brass Steel
716 Satin bronze plated, clear coated Steel
716 F10B Steel
A5 Steel Steel
406 Zinc/Brass
About Allegion
Allegion (NYSE: ALLE) is a global pioneer in safety and security, with leading
brands like CISA®, Interflex®, LCN®, Schlage® and Von Duprin®. Focusing on security
around the door and adjacent areas, Allegion produces a range of solutions for
homes, businesses, schools and other institutions. Allegion is a $2 billion company,
with products sold in almost 130 countries. For more, visit www.allegion.com.
© 2015 Allegion
009005, Rev. 04/15
www.allegion.com/us
UNCLASSIFIED

087145-009-00 Scac Febr Door SHW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

087145-009-00 Scac Febr Door SHW

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

087145-009-00 Scac Febr Door SHW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OBO-T-1464

Overseas Buildings Operations (OBO)

OBO Comments to Submittal No. 087145-009-00

ProjNet Transmittal ID No. 087145-009-00

SCAC FEBR Door SHW

1. This is a partial submission of elements specified under section 087145.

OBO Kampala UNCLASSIFIED Page 1 of 1

2. SUBMITTAL HISTORY AND COMMENTS

The L series only has keypad on one side -

LL1021M LL1021M OBO TO REVIEW

SECTION 087145 - SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE

1. Division 01 Section “Construction Submittals.”

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Division 01 requirements.

a. The Binder PDF shall be “Bookmarked” to identify each different “Submittal

B. Product Data: Submittals (PDx format):

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 1

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 2

Door Room Key ID Change Control Master SHW

K. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article.

L. Closeout Submittals: Submit specified warranty in accordance with Division 01 requirements.

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 3

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 01 requirements.

1. Pack each hardware item separately. Include manufacturer's printed installation

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 4

2.1 APPROVED PRODUCTS

1. Cycle Testing: 1,000,000 (Exceeds ANSI requirements, DOS specific requirement).

1. Cycle Testing: 1,500,000.

D. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 5

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 19 mm (3/4-inch) latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 70 mm (2-3/4 inches), unless otherwise indicated.

1. Description: As indicated by manufacturer's design designation in Part 3.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; ASSA ABLOY, - Manufacturer named in

2.4 CYLINDERS, CORES AND KEYS

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 6

a. Medeco Security Locks, Inc. an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

3. Cylinders, Cores, & Keys:

a. Provide mortise/rim cylinder shells with tailpieces/cams and interchangeable cores

1) Medeco Security Locks, Inc.,

a) Six-Pin Large Format Interchangeable Core (LFIC); Medeco Original

a) Six-Pin LFIC; Medeco M3 Original product (32F) with DS reserved

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 7

2.5 KEY CONTROL ACCESSORIES

2.6 POWER-ASSIST OPERATORS

1. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

B. Standard: BHMA A156.19.

1. Activation of power-assist shall open doors to 90-degrees.

D. Required Features: Manufacturer's standard cast iron construction.

1. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic.

SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087145 - 8